Extron electronic Switch 68 1383 01 REV E User Manual

User Guide  
Twisted Pair  
MTPX Plus Series  
MTP Twisted Pair Matrix Switchers  
68-1383-01 Rev. E  
08 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FCC Class A Notice  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to part 15  
of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:  
This device may not cause harmful interference.  
1. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.  
The Class A limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment  
is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy  
and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio  
communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which  
case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.  
NOTE: This unit was tested with shielded cables on the peripheral devices. Shielded cables must be used with  
the unit to ensure compliance with FCC emissions limits.  
For more information on safety guidelines, regulatory compliances, EMI/EMF compliance, accessibility,  
and related topics, click here.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conventions Used in this Guide  
In this user guide, the following are used:  
NOTE: A note draws attention to important information.  
TIP: A tip provides a suggestion to make working with the application easier.  
CAUTION: A caution indicates a potential hazard to equipment or data.  
WARNING: A warning warns of things or actions that might cause injury, death, or  
other severe consequences.  
Commands are written in the fonts shown here:  
^ARMerge Scene,,Op1 scene 1,1^B51^W^C  
[01]R000400300004000080000600[02]35[17][03]  
*
*
*
*
CE  
EX! X2! X2$ X2# X2% }  
NOTE: For commands and examples of computer or device responses mentioned  
in this guide, the character “0” is used for the number zero and “O”  
represents the capital letter “o.”  
Computer responses and directory paths that do not have variables are written in the font  
shown here:  
Reply from 208.132.180.48: bytes=32 times=2ms TTL=32  
C:\Program Files\Extron  
Variables are written in slanted form as shown here:  
ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx —t  
SOH R Data STX Command ETB ETX  
Selectable items, such as menu names, menu options, buttons, tabs, and field names are  
written in the font shown here:  
From the Filemenu, select New.  
Click the OKbutton.  
Copyright  
© 2011 Extron Electronics. All rights reserved.  
Trademarks  
All trademarks mentioned in this guide are the properties of their respective owners.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
Defining the Audio/RS-232 Wire Pair.......... 62  
Selecting the Rear Panel Remote Port  
Protocol and Baud Rate............................. 63  
Rear Panel Operations.................................... 64  
Performing a Hard Reset (Reset 1).............. 64  
Performing Soft System Resets  
Introduction ............................................ 1  
About this Manual........................................... 1  
About the Matrix Switchers.............................. 1  
TP Cable Advantages ................................... 4  
Features........................................................... 8  
(Resets 3, 4, and 5) ................................... 66  
Optimizing the Audio..................................... 67  
Video Adjustments......................................... 67  
Troubleshooting............................................. 67  
Configuration Worksheets ............................. 68  
Worksheet Example 1: System equipment.. 68  
Worksheet Example 2: Daily Configuration 69  
Worksheet Example 3: Test configuration... 70  
32-button Switchers Configuration  
Installation.............................................11  
Mounting the Switcher.................................. 11  
Rear Panel Cabling and Settings..................... 11  
Signal Inputs.............................................. 12  
RS-232 Output Inserts................................ 15  
Signal Outputs........................................... 16  
Remote Connection................................... 18  
Ethernet Connection.................................. 19  
Reset Button.............................................. 20  
Power Connection ..................................... 20  
Front Panel Configuration Port....................... 20  
Worksheet................................................ 71  
16-button Switchers Configuration  
Worksheet................................................ 72  
Programming Guide ..............................73  
Operation ...............................................22  
Local Host-Control Ports ................................ 74  
Ethernet (LAN) Port........................................ 75  
Default IP addresses................................... 75  
Establishing a Connection.......................... 75  
Connection Timeouts................................. 75  
Number of Connections............................. 76  
Using Verbose Mode.................................. 76  
Host-to-Switcher Instructions ......................... 76  
Switcher-initiated Messages ........................... 76  
Switcher Error Responses ............................... 77  
Using the Command and Response Tables ..... 78  
Special Characters.......................................... 95  
Front Panel Controls and Indicators................ 22  
Input and Output Buttons.......................... 24  
Control Buttons and LEDs .......................... 26  
I/O Controls ............................................... 28  
Button Icons .............................................. 29  
Front Panel Operations................................... 29  
Definitions ................................................. 30  
Power........................................................ 30  
Front Panel Security Lockouts..................... 30  
Creating a Configuration ........................... 31  
Viewing the Configuration......................... 36  
I/O Grouping.............................................. 39  
Using Presets.............................................. 43  
Muting and Unmuting  
Matrix Software.....................................96  
Audio/RS-232 Outputs.............................. 46  
Viewing and Adjusting  
the Input Audio Level................................ 48  
Viewing and Adjusting  
the Local Output Volume .......................... 53  
Setting the Front Panel Locks  
(Executive Modes)..................................... 59  
Performing a System Reset  
Matrix Switchers Control Program.................. 96  
Installing the Software ............................... 97  
Software Operation via Ethernet ................ 98  
Using the Matrix Switcher Control  
Software................................................... 99  
Updating the Firmware ............................ 107  
Uploading HTML Files .............................. 112  
Windows Buttons, Drop Boxes,  
from the Front Panel ................................. 60  
Background Illumination ............................ 61  
and Trashcan........................................... 113  
MTPX Plus Series • Contents  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Emulation Mode............................. 119  
Using the Help System ............................. 120  
Optimizing the Video................................... 121  
MTP Transmitter Pre-Peak Selection.......... 121  
MTPX Level/Peaking Setting ..................... 121  
MTPX Skew Setting.................................. 122  
MTPX Plus Pre-Peak Selection................... 123  
MTP Receiver Level/Peaking Setting.......... 123  
Button-Label Generator Program ................. 124  
Using the Button-Label Generator  
Ethernet Connection............................146  
Ethernet Link ............................................... 146  
Ethernet Connection................................ 146  
Default IP Address.................................... 146  
Pinging to Determine the  
Extron IP Address.................................... 147  
Pinging to Determine the  
Web IP Address....................................... 147  
Configuring the MTPX Plus switcher for  
Network Use via the ARP Command ....... 147  
Connecting as a Telnet Client................... 149  
Telnet Tips................................................ 149  
Subnetting — A Primer................................ 151  
Gateways................................................. 151  
Local and Remote Devices........................ 151  
IP Addresses and Octets........................... 151  
Subnet Masks and Octets......................... 151  
Determining Whether Devices  
Software................................................. 125  
HTML Operation ...................................126  
Download the Startup Page......................... 127  
Status Tab.................................................... 128  
System Status Page.................................. 128  
Configuration Tab........................................ 129  
System Settings Page ............................... 129  
Passwords Page........................................ 132  
Email Settings Page.................................. 133  
Firmware Upgrade Page........................... 135  
File Management Tab................................... 136  
File Management Page............................. 136  
Control Tab.................................................. 137  
User Control page.................................... 137  
Picture Settings Page................................ 138  
MTPX Configuration Page........................ 141  
I/O Settings Page...................................... 142  
Global Presets Page.................................. 145  
Are on the Same Subnet......................... 152  
Reference Information ........................153  
Specifications............................................... 153  
Part Numbers and Accessories...................... 157  
MTPX Plus Matrix Switcher  
Part Numbers.......................................... 157  
Included Parts .......................................... 157  
Replacement Parts and Accessories .......... 157  
Optional Accessories................................ 158  
Cables ..................................................... 158  
Mounting the Switcher................................ 159  
Tabletop Use............................................ 159  
UL Rack-Mounting Guidelines.................. 159  
Mounting Instructions.............................. 160  
Button Labels............................................... 161  
Installing Labels........................................ 161  
MTPX Plus Series • Contents  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Introduction  
About this Manual  
This manual contains installation, configuration, and operating information for the Extron®  
MTPX Plus MTP Twisted Pair Matrix Switchers.  
About the Matrix Switchers  
The MTPX Plus matrix switchers distribute signals that are compatible with the Extron MTP  
and VTT/VTR product lines. The matrix switcher routes a twisted pair (TP) or video input  
signal to any combination of TP or video outputs. Depending on the MTP model, the routed  
TP signal can include RGB or low resolution video and either mono audio or transmitter-to-  
receiver RS-232 serial communications. The matrix switcher can route multiple input/output  
configurations simultaneously.  
NOTE: The receiver-to-transmitter serial communications and remote power capabilities  
available with certain MTP models are not supported by this matrix switcher.  
The matrix switcher is a single box solution (see figure 1 on the next page) to complex TP  
and video signal routing applications. Each input and output is individually isolated and  
buffered. Any input can be switched to any one or all outputs with virtually no crosstalk  
or signal noise between channels. Multiple ties between inputs and outputs can exist  
simultaneously  
The MTPX Plus series are available in a variety of matrix sizes (the matrix size is the number  
of inputs and outputs):  
MTPX Plus 816  
MTPX Plus 128  
MTPX Plus 168  
MTPX Plus 1616  
MTPX Plus 1632  
MTPX Plus 3216  
MTPX Plus 3232  
(8 inputs by 16 outputs)  
(12 inputs by 8 outputs)  
(16 inputs by 8 outputs)  
(16 inputs by 16 outputs)  
(16 inputs by 32 outputs)  
(32 inputs by 16 outputs)  
(32 inputs by 32 outputs)  
The MTPX Plus switchers input and output TP signals on RJ-45 connectors. A pre-peaking  
feature on selected outputs allows you to boost the transmission distance of the output TP  
signal.  
MTPX Plus Series • Introduction  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Rack Mounted PC  
Control  
System  
TCP/IP  
Network  
Extron  
MTP U R RSA SEQ  
Universal Receiver  
RS-232  
Tx Rx  
CE  
A
SP  
S
2
OUTPUT  
MONO AUDIO  
1
RS 232  
Audio  
ID  
V
Y  
/C  
Y
Y
-
R
POWER  
X
12V  
T
.5A MA  
INPU  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
32  
16  
11  
15  
10  
30  
14  
9
29  
13  
INPUTS  
8
28  
12  
7
7  
11  
6
26  
10  
32  
5
25  
9
31  
S-video  
RGBHV  
30  
4
24  
8
29  
3
23  
7
CONTRL  
OUTPUTS  
2
22  
6
28  
T
RESE  
1
21  
5
27  
ETHE
K
26  
20  
4
IN  
L
R
25  
19  
3
8
T
A
L
18  
24  
R
7
17  
23  
LOCAL INP
R
S
6
22  
L
Flat Panel Display  
R
1
2
S
Extron  
MTP U R A  
Universal Receiver  
L
MONO AOUU
20  
R
4
OUTPUT  
L
9  
1
LOCAL OUTP
1
R
3
2
18  
L
MONO AUDIO  
1
T
8
R
17  
2
INPU  
SELEC  
7
L
I
D
V
L
T
A
N
6
C
O
TIO  
R
L
Rx  
16  
x
1
T
L
D
S
T
E
3
5
T
Rx  
15  
L
I
A
T
2
1
.
5
RJ-4  
E
.
R
S
a
I
T
.
U
Rx  
14  
R
Audio  
4
x
U
6
RS-232 OUTPUT ER  
Y/C  
P
T
x  
x
L
3
T
Rx  
x
M
T
R
5
2
x
x  
Rx  
13  
Tx  
L
Rx  
Rx  
1
x
T
x  
R
12  
AUDIO INPUT4S  
L
Rx  
x  
x
T
T
11  
R
3
Rx  
x
S-video  
T
x  
10  
x
POWER  
12V  
.5A M
T
L
Rx  
T
Extron  
9
x
T
R
2
x  
L
INPU  
x
T
R
Rx  
1
x
T
L
MTPX Plus 3232  
Twisted Pair  
Matrix Switcher  
RGBHV  
A
A
SERIES  
HP  
AUDIO POWER AMPLIFIER  
D
H
5
1
T
R
Extron  
SI 28  
Surface-mount  
P
INPUT  
T
M
T
L
TEC  
O
/PR  
2
ITER  
K
1
LIM  
A
A
L
E
R
P
SIGN  
E
-P  
OV  
E
TEM  
R
P
Extron  
ON  
AUDIO N  
OUTPUT  
O
AUDI  
OUTPUT  
Projector  
O
HPA 502  
Audio Power  
Ampliꢀer  
MTP  
T
SV  
A
OFF  
S-VIDE  
COM
X
12V MA  
0.5a  
MONITO  
Speakers  
Extron  
POWER  
12V  
INUT  
.5A MAX  
MTP T SV A  
Transmitter  
Extron  
MTP T 15HD A  
Extron  
MTP T 15HD A D  
Transmitter  
Transmitter  
PC  
PC  
DVD  
Figure 1. Typical MTPX Plus Twisted Pair Matrix Switcher Application  
Additionally, some inputs feature 15-pin HD and 5-pole 3.5 mm captive screw input  
connectors for local RGB (VGA) and stereo audio inputs without an MTP transmitter. Some  
outputs feature 15-pin HD output connectors and 5-pole 3.5 mm captive screw ports for  
local RGB (VGA) and mono audio output without an MTP receiver. The local input and  
output 15-pin HD connectors can also support HD-YUV video, YUV video, S-video, and  
composite video.  
NOTE: For most switchers, the local inputs are an option for use in place of the TP  
input (input 1 can be either on the local connectors or the TP connector, for  
example).  
For the MTPX Plus 128, four inputs are local only and eight inputs are TP only.  
When audio is part of the TP input signal, the audio switching can either be linked with the  
video (audio follow) or be independent of the video (audio breakaway). Adjustable input  
audio gain and attenuation compensates for level differences between audio inputs.  
NOTE: For low resolution MTPs (S-video and composite video) on the TP inputs, the  
MTPX Plus audio circuits are compatible only with the newer generation,  
mono audio models. See your MTP transmitter/ receiver and refer to the  
associated manual to determine which MTP models you have.  
The matrix switcher can be remotely controlled via its rear panel Remote port  
(RS-232/RS-422 for most models, RS-232 only for MTPX Plus 128) and its front panel  
Configuration port (RS-232 for most models, USB port for MTPX Plus 128) using either  
Extron Windows®-based Matrix Switchers Control Program or the Simple Instruction Set  
(SIS™). The SIS is a set of basic ASCII code commands that provides control through a  
control system or PC without programming long, obscure strings of code.  
MTPX Plus Series • Introduction  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The switcher can be operated remotely by any of the following when that device is  
connected to either MTPX Plus serial port:  
A control system  
A PC  
An Extron MKP 2000 remote control panel  
An Extron MKP 3000 remote control panel  
For some outputs (most matrix sizes) or all outputs (MTPX Plus 128), bidirectional pass-  
through RS-232 signals from a dedicated source (rather than from the selected input) can  
be directly inserted into the signal set routed to the TP output. You can even route RS-232  
on a link that is normally audio, such as to an MTP U R 15HD RSA SEQ receiver, which can  
autodetect whether its signal input includes an audio component or an RS-232 component.  
The matrix switchers are housed in metal enclosures. Most models have mounting flanges  
for standard 19-inch racks built into the enclosure. The MTPX Plus 128 includes a kit for rack  
mounting.  
The switcher has an internal 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50-60 Hz, 30 watt power supply that  
provides worldwide power compatibility.  
The MTPX Plus switcher has a minimum bandwidth of 300 MHz (-3 dB).  
The switchers can also switch RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs, HDTV, component video, S-video, and  
composite video.  
MTPX Plus Series • Introduction  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TP Cable Advantages  
Twisted pair cable is much smaller, lighter, more flexible, and less expensive than coaxial  
cable. These TP products make cable runs simpler and less cumbersome. Termination of the  
cable with RJ-45 connectors is simple, quick, and economical.  
CAUTION: Do not connect this device to a computer data or telecommunications  
network.  
Transmission distances  
The maximum distances are determined by the frequency and resolution of the video signal  
being routed and by which MTPX Plus inputs and outputs (TP or local) are in the full (video  
source to display) routing path. The tables on the following pages specify the recommended  
maximum transmission distances using Extron Enhanced Skew-Free™ A/V UTP cable or UTP  
CAT 5, 5e, or 6 cable, terminated with RJ-45 connectors.  
NOTES: For all three tables, the minimum TP cable length should be 25 feet (7.5 m).  
RS-232 serial communications can be sent up to 1,000 feet (300 m) from  
the MTP transmitter output (or RS-232 output insert) to the MTP receiver TP  
input.  
It is possible to exceed the recommended distances; however, image quality  
may be reduced.  
• Daisy-chaining MTPX units by connecting a TP output from one matrix  
switcher to the TP input of a second matrix switcher is not recommended.  
Daisy chaining in this manner can lead to excessive video smearing.  
• The transmitters, receivers, and matrix switcher are designed for and perform  
best with Extron Enhanced Skew-Free A/V cable terminated in accordance  
with the TIA/EIA T 568A wiring standard. CAT 5, 5e, and 6 cables are  
acceptable, but less preferable. We also recommend the use of preterminated  
and tested cables. Cables terminated on site should be tested before use to  
ensure that they comply with Category 5 specifications.  
• Daisy-chaining MTPX units by connecting a TP output from one matrix  
switcher to the TP input of a second matrix switcher is not recommended.  
Daisy chaining in this manner can lead to excessive video smearing.  
• The recommendations shown in the tables apply equally for a transmission  
line that consists of a single transmitter, the switcher, and receiver and for a  
transmission line that encompasses a transmission daisy chain. For example,  
the maximum suggested output range (MTPX Plus TP output to MTP receiver)  
2
for 1024 x 768 video is 450 feet (135 m) (table 1 [ ]) or 500 feet (150 m)  
4
(table 2 [ ]), whether the transmission line consists of the switcher and a  
single receiver or the switcher and three daisy-chained receivers. This range  
can be extended to 500 feet or 550 feet if the output is one that has the  
Pre-Peak function and the function is turned on.  
• For daisy-chained units, the first receiver in the chain should be at least  
50 feet (15 m) from the switcher when the Pre-Peak feature is on.  
• For daisy-chained units, any receiver in the chain closer than 350 feet (105 m)  
may experience some form of over-peaking when the Pre-Peak switch is on.  
An overpeaked image may appear bloomed.  
MTPX Plus Series • Introduction  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 1. Recommended maximum TP transmission distances at 60 Hz,  
1
MTP transmitter to switcher when the display is on the MTPX Plus local (VGA)  
output  
AUDIO  
MTP  
T
15HD  
A
PRE-PEAK  
MTP Transmitter  
OUTPUT  
POWER  
12V  
.5A MAX  
ON  
1
OFF  
INPUT  
MONITOR  
LOCAL INPUTS  
INPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
LISTED  
1
T23  
®
US  
I
.T.E.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
LOCAL  
1
2
5
3
4
6
17  
1
18  
2
19  
3
20  
4
21  
5
22  
6
23  
7
24  
8
25  
26  
10  
27  
11  
28  
12  
29  
13  
30  
14  
31  
15  
32  
16  
RJ-45  
RS-232 OUTPUT INSERTION  
LOCAL OUTPUTS  
OUTPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
11  
Tx Rx  
12  
Tx Rx  
13  
Tx Rx  
14  
Tx Rx  
15  
Tx Rx  
16  
1
2
9
10  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
3.2A MAX  
CONTROL  
AUDIO INPUTS  
MONO AUDIO OUTPUTS  
ETHERNET  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
RESET  
ACT LINK  
— or —  
2
Switcher to MTP receiver when the video source is on the MTPX Plus local  
(VGA) input  
MTP Receiver  
OUTPUTS  
MTP  
U
R
A
LOCAL INPUTS  
INPUTS  
POWER  
12V  
0.5A MAX  
VID  
Y/C  
MONO AUDIO  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
LISTED  
L
R
1
T
2
3
®
US  
I
.T.E.  
INPUT  
SELECT  
RGB  
1
2
5
3
INPUT  
LOCAL  
4
6
17  
1
18  
2
19  
3
20  
4
21  
5
22  
6
23  
7
24  
8
25  
26  
10  
27  
11  
28  
12  
29  
13  
30  
14  
31  
15  
32  
16  
RJ-45  
RS-232 OUTPUT INSERTION  
LOCAL OUTPUTS  
OUTPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
11  
Tx Rx  
12  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
1
2
9
10  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
3.2A MAX  
CONTROL  
AUDIO INPUTS  
MONO AUDIO OUTPUTS  
ETHERNET  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
RESET  
ACT LINK  
2
Video format  
Sending unit Pre-Peak  
Off On  
Maximum distance  
High Variable  
1
2
quality  
quality  
Component,  
S-video,  
<300' (90 m)  
>350' (105 m)  
800' (285 m)  
1,000' (300 m)  
Composite  
640 x 480  
<300' (90 m)  
<300' (90 m)  
<300' (90 m)  
<300' (90 m)  
<250' (75 m)  
<250' (75 m)  
<250' (75 m)  
<250' (75 m)  
<250' (75 m)  
<250' (75 m)  
<250' (75 m)  
<250' (75 m)  
<250' (75 m)  
<250' (75 m)  
<250' (75 m)  
>350' (105 m)  
>350' (105 m)  
>350' (105 m)  
>350' (105 m)  
>300' (90 m)  
>300' (90 m)  
>300' (90 m)  
>300' (90 m)  
>300' (90 m)  
>300' (90 m)  
>300' (90 m)  
>300' (90 m)  
>300' (90 m)  
>300' (90 m)  
>300' (90 m)  
700' (215 m)  
550' (170 m)  
500' (150 m)  
400' (120 m)  
350' (105 m)  
400' (120 m)  
400' (120 m)  
400' (120 m)  
350' (105 m)  
350' (105 m)  
300' (90 m)  
300' (90 m)  
400' (120 m)  
300' (90 m)  
300' (90 m)  
750' (230 m)  
650' (200 m)  
600' (185 m)  
500' (150 m)  
450' (135 m)  
500' (150 m)  
450' (135 m)  
450' (135 m)  
400' (120 m)  
400' (120 m)  
450' (135 m)  
400' (120 m)  
500' (150 m)  
400' (120 m)  
400' (120 m)  
800 x 600  
1024 x 768*  
1280 x 960*  
1280 x 1024*  
1360 x 765  
1365 x 768  
1366 x 768  
1440 x 900  
1400 x 1050  
1600 x 1200*  
1920 x 1200  
HDTV 720p  
HDTV 1080i  
HDTV 1080p  
NOTE: Resolutions marked with an asterisk (*) in this table have the same range  
specifications at 75 Hz.  
MTPX Plus Series • Introduction  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 2. Recommended maximum TP transmission distances at 60 Hz, —  
transmitter to receiver using MTPX Plus TP inputs and outputs  
MTP Transmitter  
AUDIO  
MTP  
T
15HD  
A
PRE-PEAK  
ON  
POWER  
12V  
.5A MAX  
MTP Receiver  
3
OUTPUTS  
MTP  
U
R
A
OFF  
INPUT  
MONITOR  
OUTPUT  
LOCAL INPUTS  
INPUTS  
POWER  
12V  
0.5A MAX  
VID  
Y/C  
MONO AUDIO  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
L
I
S
T
E
D
L
R
1
T23  
US  
I
.T.E.  
RGB  
INPUT  
INPUT  
1
2
5
3
SELECT  
LOCAL  
4
6
17  
1
18  
19  
3
20  
4
21  
5
22  
6
23  
7
24  
8
25  
26  
10  
27  
11  
28  
12  
29  
13  
30  
14  
31  
15  
32  
16  
RJ-45  
RS-232 OUTPUT INSERTION  
LOCAL OUTPUTS  
OUTPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2
9
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
11  
Tx Rx  
12  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
1
2
9
10  
13  
14  
15  
16  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
3.2A MAX  
CONTROL  
AUDIO INPUTS  
MONO AUDIO OUTPUTS  
ETHERNET  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
RESET  
4
ACT LINK  
Video format  
MTPX Pre-Peak  
Maximum distance  
High quality Variable quality  
Off  
On  
>350'  
MTPX  
input  
MTPX  
output  
MTPX  
input  
MTPX  
output  
3
4
3
4
Component,  
S-video  
<300'  
(90 m)  
700'  
(215 m)  
700'  
(215 m)  
700'  
(215 m)  
800'  
(245 m)  
(105 m)  
Composite  
<300'  
(90 m)  
>350'  
(105 m)  
700'  
(215 m)  
700'  
(215 m)  
750'  
(230 m)  
750'  
(230 m)  
640 x 480  
<300'  
(90 m)  
>350'  
(105 m)  
550'  
(170 m)  
600'  
(185 m)  
600'  
(185 m)  
650'  
(200 m)  
800 x 600  
<300'  
(90 m)  
>350'  
(105 m)  
500'  
(150 m)  
500'  
(150 m)  
600'  
(185 m)  
600'  
(185 m)  
1024 x 768*  
1280 x 960*  
1280 x 1024*  
1360 x 765  
1365 x 768  
1366 x 768  
1440 x 900  
1400 x 1050  
1600 x 1200*  
1920 x 1200  
HDTV 720p  
HDTV 1080i  
HDTV 1080p  
<300'  
(90 m)  
>350'  
(105 m)  
450'  
(135 m)  
450'  
(135 m)  
550'  
(170 m)  
550'  
(170 m)  
<300'  
(90 m)  
>350'  
(105 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
450'  
(135 m)  
450'  
(135 m)  
<250'  
(75 m)  
>300'  
(90 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
450'  
(135 m)  
450'  
(135 m)  
<250'  
(75 m)  
>300'  
(90 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
500'  
(150 m)  
500'  
(150 m)  
<250'  
(75 m)  
>300'  
(90 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
450'  
(135 m)  
450'  
(135 m)  
<250'  
(75 m)  
>300'  
(90 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
450'  
(135 m)  
450'  
(135 m)  
<250'  
(75 m)  
>300'  
(90 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
300'  
(90 m)  
400'  
(120 m)  
400'  
(120 m)  
<250'  
(75 m)  
>300'  
(90 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
300'  
(90 m)  
400'  
(120 m)  
400'  
(120 m)  
<250'  
(75 m)  
>300'  
(90 m)  
300'  
(90 m)  
300'  
(90 m)  
450'  
(135 m)  
450'  
(135 m)  
<200'  
(60 m)  
>250'  
(75 m)  
300'  
(90 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
400'  
(120 m)  
400'  
(120 m)  
<250'  
(75 m)  
>300'  
(90 m)  
400'  
(120 m)  
400'  
(120 m)  
500'  
(150 m)  
500'  
(150 m)  
<200'  
(60 m)  
>250'  
(75 m)  
300'  
(90 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
400'  
(120 m)  
400'  
(120 m)  
<200'  
(60 m)  
>250'  
(75 m)  
300'  
(90 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
400'  
(120 m)  
400'  
(120 m)  
NOTE: Resolutions marked with an asterisk (*) in this table have the same range  
specifications at 75 Hz.  
MTPX Plus Series • Introduction  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 3. Recommended maximum TP transmission distances at 60 Hz, —  
VTT transmitter to VTR receiver using MTPX TP inputs and outputs  
VTT Transmitter  
TX  
POWER  
VIDEO INPUT  
3
VTR Receiver  
LOCAL INPUTS  
INPUTS  
RX  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
LISTED  
1
T23  
US  
POWER  
VIDEO OUTPUT  
I
.T.E.  
INPUT  
1
2
5
3
SELECT  
LOCAL  
4
6
17  
1
18  
2
19  
3
20  
4
21  
5
22  
6
23  
7
24  
8
25  
26  
10  
27  
11  
28  
12  
29  
13  
30  
14  
31  
15  
32  
16  
RJ-45  
RS-232 OUTPUT INSERTION  
LOCAL OUTPUTS  
OUTPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
11  
Tx Rx  
12  
Tx Rx  
13  
Tx Rx  
14  
Tx Rx  
15  
Tx Rx  
16  
1
2
9
10  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
3.2A MAX  
CONTROL  
AUDIO INPUTS  
MONO AUDIO OUTPUTS  
ETHERNET  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
RESET  
ACT LINK  
4
Video format  
MTPX Pre-Peak  
Maximum distance  
High quality Variable quality  
Off  
On  
MTPX  
MTPX  
MTPX  
MTPX  
3
4
3
4
input  
output  
input  
output  
640 x 480  
<300'  
(90 m)  
>350'  
(105 m)  
400'  
(120 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
400'  
(120 m)  
400'  
(120 m)  
800 x 600  
<250'  
(75 m)  
>300'  
(90 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
300'  
(90 m)  
400'  
(120 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
1024 x 768  
1280 x 960  
1280 x 1024  
1360 x 765  
1365 x 768  
1366 x 768  
1440 x 900  
1400 x 1050  
1600 x 1200  
<150'  
(45 m)  
>200'  
(60 m)  
300'  
(90 m)  
300'  
(90 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
350'  
(105 m)  
<150'  
(45 m)  
>200'  
(60 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
200'  
(60 m)  
300'  
(90 m)  
300'  
(90 m)  
<150'  
(45 m)  
>200'  
(60 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
200'  
(60 m)  
300'  
(90 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
<150'  
(45 m)  
>200'  
(60 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
200'  
(60 m)  
300'  
(90 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
<150'  
(45 m)  
>200'  
(60 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
200'  
(60 m)  
300'  
(90 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
<150'  
(45 m)  
>200'  
(60 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
200'  
(60 m)  
300'  
(90 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
<150'  
(45 m)  
>200'  
(60 m)  
200'  
(60 m)  
200'  
(60 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
<150'  
(45 m)  
>200'  
(60 m)  
200'  
(60 m)  
200'  
(60 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
<100'  
(30 m)  
>150'  
(45 m)  
200'  
(60 m)  
150'  
(45 m)  
250'  
(75 m)  
200'  
(60 m)  
MTPX Plus Series • Introduction  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Skew equalization  
Skew exists between wire pairs when the physical length of one wire pair is different from  
another. Skew affects the displayed image when the differential length between wire pairs  
exceeds 2 feet. This causes the timing of the red, green, and blue video signals to appear out  
of alignment (horizontal registration errors). The signals transmitted on the shortest pair are  
shifted to the left if you are viewing white lines on a black background. A white vertical line  
on a black field can appear as individual red, green, and blue lines that are close together.  
The signal transmitted on the shortest wire pair leads the other colors and appears to the left  
on the display. As the transmission cable length increases, the skew effect increases.  
The MTPX Plus has a skew equalizer function that is available using SIS, the Matrix Switchers  
Control Program, or built-in HTML page control. The skew function provides separate time  
delay circuits on the red, green, and blue video lines on the inputs and the outputs. Each  
time delay circuit can be independently adjusted, from 0 to 62 nanoseconds, to properly  
align the red, green, and blue video signals on the displayed image. When correctly set, the  
red, green, or blue video signal on the shortest wire pair is delayed to properly converge the  
displayed video image.  
UTP cable test equipment measures and reports wire pair length. The report on the various  
pair lengths can be used to properly equalize pair skew. If UTP cable test measurement  
cannot be done, pair skew can still be equalized by viewing a test pattern with a critical eye.  
Examine the test pattern for loss of horizontal registration and, through a process of trial  
and error, equalize any pair skew.  
Features  
Twisted pair inputs and outputs — The switchers input and output TP signals on  
female RJ-45 connectors.  
NOTE: For low resolution MTPs (S-video and composite video) on the TP inputs, the  
MTPX Plus audio circuits are compatible only with the newer generation,  
mono audio models. See your MTP transmitter/ receiver and refer to the  
associated manual to determine which MTP models you have.  
Local video inputs and outputs — The switchers directly input and output RGBHV or  
RGBS (VGA) video on 15-pin HD connectors. They can also input and output RGsB, RsGsBs,  
component/HDTV, S-video, or composite video.  
Local audio inputs — The switchers directly input balanced or unbalanced stereo audio  
on 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw terminals.  
Audio input gain/attenuation — The volume of each audio input can be adjusted so  
there are no noticeable volume differences between sources. You can set the input level of  
audio gain or attenuation (-18 dB to +24 dB) via the front panel or via serial port control.  
Audio output volume — The volume of each audio signal that is output on the 5-pole,  
3.5 mm captive screw input connectors can be displayed and adjusted through a range of  
full output to complete silence. Adjustments can be made from the front panel or remote  
control.  
MTPX Plus Series • Introduction  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Switching flexibility — The switcher provides individually buffered, independent, matrix  
switched outputs with audio follow and audio breakaway.  
Tie any input to any or all outputs.  
Quick multiple tie — Multiple inputs can be switched to multiple outputs  
simultaneously. This allows all displays (outputs) to change from source to source at  
the same time.  
Audio follow — Audio can be switched with its corresponding video input via front  
panel control or via serial port remote control.  
Audio breakaway — Audio can be broken away from its corresponding video  
signal. This feature allows any audio signal to be tied to one or all outputs in any  
combination with or without an accompanying video signal. Audio breakaway  
switching can be done via front panel control or via serial port remote control.  
Operational flexibility — Operations such as input/output selection, setting of presets,  
and adjustment of audio levels can be performed using the front panel or via either serial  
port. The serial ports allow remote control via a PC or a control system.  
Front panel controls — The front panel controls support input and output  
selection, preset creation and selection, audio gain and attenuation, and volume  
control. The front panel features slots for labels that can identify each input and  
output with text or graphics.  
Matrix Switchers Control Program — For serial port remote control from a PC,  
the Extron Windows-based Matrix Switchers Control Program provides a graphical  
interface and drag-and-drop/point-and-click operation. The Matrix Switchers Control  
Program also has an emulation mode that lets you create a switcher configuration file  
at the home office and then download it for use by the switcher on site.  
Simple Instruction Set (SIS) — The remote control protocol uses the Extron SIS  
for easy programming and operation.  
Remote control panels and keypads — The matrix switchers are remote  
controllable, using the optional MKP 2000 and MKP 3000 remote control keypads.  
These remote control devices are easy to use and provide tactile buttons for quick  
selection. Each MKP can be used for input-to-output switching or one-touch switching  
for a particular output. The MKP 3000 also can be used for selection of global presets.  
EDID Minder (MTPX Plus 128 only) — Captures and stored EDID information,  
continuously making it available to all local inputs. EDID minder has two operating modes:  
Automatic (default) — Captures EDID for displays connected to the local outputs  
and provides data to the appropriate local inputs.  
User Assigned Mode — Rates from EDID table can be selected and assigned to  
any input. EDID file for the display connected to output 1 can be stored in the EDID  
table (4 user assigned locations available).  
Upgradeable firmware — The firmware that controls all switcher operations can be  
upgraded in the field via either serial port, without taking the switcher out of service.  
Firmware upgrades are available for download on the Extron website, www.extron.com,  
and can be installed using the Matrix Switchers Control Program.  
Labeling — The Extron button label software is shipped with every Extron matrix switcher.  
You can create labels to place above the front panel input buttons and below the output  
buttons, with names, alphanumeric characters, or color bitmaps for easy and intuitive input  
and output selection. Alternatively, labels can be made with any Brother® P-Touchor  
comparable labeler.  
Global memory presets — 32 global memory presets are a time-saving feature that  
lets you set up and store input/output configurations in advance. You can then recall those  
configurations, when needed, with a few simple steps on the front panel.  
MTPX Plus Series • Introduction  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rack mounting — The 1U high (MTPX Plus 128), 2U high (other matrix sizes 1616  
and smaller), or 3U high (matrix sizes 1632 and larger) enclosure is rack mountable in any  
conventional 19-inch wide wide rack. The 2U and 3U enclosures are mountable without  
extra hardware. The 1U enclosure is rack mountable using the provided mounting kit.  
Three front panel security lockout modes (Executive modes) — If a matrix  
switcher is installed in an open area, where operation by unauthorized personnel may be  
a problem, either of two security lockout modes can be implemented (the third mode is  
unlocked). When a front panel lockout mode is enabled, a special button combination or  
SIS command is required to unlock the front panel controls and make the front panel fully  
operational.  
Power — The 100 VAC to 240 VAC internal power supply provides worldwide power  
compatibility.  
MTPX Plus Series • Introduction  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Installation  
This sections details the installation of the MTPX Plus Matrix Switchers, including:  
Mounting the Switcher  
CAUTION: Installation and service must be performed by authorized personnel only.  
Detailed mounting instructions can be found in the “Reference Information“ section at  
the end of this guide. The MTPX Plus switchers are housed in a 1U high (MTPX Plus 128),  
2U high (other matrix sizes 1616 and smaller), or 3U high (matrix sizes 1632 and larger)  
metal enclosures. The 1U enclosure is rack mountable using the provided MBD 149  
Through-desk and rack mounting kit (part number 70-077-03). The 2U and 3U enclosures  
are mountable without extra hardware.  
Rear Panel Cabling and Settings  
Figure 2 shows the rear panel of the MTPX Plus 128.  
100-240V 0.8A  
LOCAL INPUTS  
INPUTS  
LOCAL OUTPUTS  
OUTPUTS  
RS-232 OUTPUT INSERT  
1
R
2
R
L
L
1
R
L
1
5
2
6
3
4
8
5
6
7
8
1
1
2
1
2
3
4
Tx Rx  
LAN  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
REMOTE  
RS-232  
3
2
L
4
5
6
7
8
3
R
4
R
2
R
L
L
50-60Hz  
7
9
10  
11  
12  
Tx Rx  
ACT LINK  
13  
2
3
1
7
8
6
5
9
11 10  
Figure 2. MTPX Plus 128 Twisted Pair Matrix Switcher  
Figure 3 shows the rear panel of the MTPX Plus 1616.  
8
7
4
5
LOCAL OUTPUT  
RGB  
LOCAL INPUTS  
RGB  
CONTROL  
RS - 232 OUTPUT INSERT  
1
12  
11  
1
2
3
Tx Rx  
4
Tx Rx  
5
Tx Rx  
6
Tx Rx  
7
8
RESET  
LISTED  
1T23  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
RGB  
RGB  
LOCAL  
ON  
I.T.E.  
2
3
1
2
-
3
RJ  
45  
OUTPUTS  
INPUTS  
AUDIO  
INPUT  
SELECT  
1.6A MAX  
1
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10  
1
2
3
4
R
R
R
R
L
L
L
L
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
MONO AUDIO OUTPUTS  
13  
3
2
1
6
Figure 3. MTPX Plus 1616 Twisted Pair Matrix Switcher  
NOTE: The MTPX Plus 816 and MTPX Plus 168 are housed in the same 2U enclosure,  
but have fewer input connectors (8 x 16 matrix) or output connectors (16 x 8  
matrix) to accommodate their smaller matrix sizes.  
MTPX Plus Series • Installation  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Figure 4 shows the rear panel of the MTPX Plus 3232.  
2
7
1
LOCAL INPUTS  
INPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
LISTED  
1T23  
US  
I.T.E.  
®
INPUTS  
INPUT  
1
2
5
3
SELECT  
LOCAL  
4
5
4
6
17  
1
18  
2
19  
3
20  
4
21  
5
22  
6
23  
7
24  
8
25  
26  
10  
27  
11  
28  
12  
29  
13  
30  
14  
31  
15  
32  
16  
RJ-45  
RS-232 OUTPUT INSERTION  
LOCAL OUTPUTS  
OUTPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
11  
Tx Rx  
12  
Tx Rx  
13  
Tx Rx  
14  
Tx Rx  
15  
Tx Rx  
16  
1
2
6
9
10  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
Tx Rx  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
3.2A MAX  
CONTROL  
AUDIO INPUTS  
MONO AUDIO OUTPUTS  
ETHERNET  
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
RESET  
ACT LINK  
13  
3
8
11 12 10  
Figure 4. MTPX Plus 3232 Twisted Pair Matrix Switcher  
NOTE: The MTPX Plus 1632 and MTPX Plus 3216 are housed in the same 3U enclosure,  
but have fewer input connectors (16 x 32 matrix) or output connectors  
(32 x 16 matrix) to accommodate their smaller matrix sizes.  
CAUTIONS: Use Electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions (that is, be electrically  
grounded) when making connections. Electrostatic discharge can damage  
equipment, even if you cannot feel, see, or hear it.  
Remove system power before making any connections.  
Signal Inputs  
a Inputs (TP) connectors — Connect the TP outputs of compatible MTP or VTT  
transmitters to these RJ-45 female connectors.  
CAUTION: Do not connect this device to a computer data or telecommunications  
network.  
NOTES: Configure the switcher for the appropriate content on the audio/RS-232  
wire pair (pins 3 and 6) for each TP input (see “Defining the Audio/  
RS-232 Wire Pair“ in the “Operation” section). You can also use  
SIS commands (see the “Programming Guide” section), the Matrix  
Switchers Control Program (see the “Matrix Software“ section), or the  
HTML pages (see the “HTML Operation” section).  
For best results, use a minimum cable length of at least 25 feet (7.5 m)  
between the transmitter and the MTPX input and between the MTPX  
output and the transmitter.  
RJ-45 termination with CAT 5, CAT 5e, or CAT 6 cable must comply with  
the TIA/EIA T568A or TIA/EIA T568B wiring standards for all connections.  
RJ-45 termination with Enhanced Skew-Free A/V UTP cable must comply  
with TIA/EIA T568A only.  
For low resolution MTPs (S-video and composite video) on the TP  
inputs, the MTPX Plus audio circuits are compatible only with the newer  
generation, mono audio models. See your MTP transmitter/ receiver and  
refer to the associated manual to determine which MTP models you have.  
MTPX Plus Series • Installation  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 5 shows the recommended termination of TP cables in accordance with the  
TIA/EIA T568A or TIA/EIA T568B wiring standards. You can use either standard with CAT  
5, 5e, or 6 cable, but use the same standard on both ends of the cable.  
Pins:  
12345678  
T568A  
T568B  
Video input (via transmitter or local input)  
Secondary input  
Pin Wire color  
Wire color  
RGB  
Composite  
Reserved  
Reserved  
S-video  
Stereo audio RS-232  
1
White-green White-orange Red+/V. sync+  
Chroma (C)+  
Chroma (C)-  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Green  
Orange  
Red–/V. sync–  
White-orange White-green  
Mono audio+ RS-232+  
Blue  
Blue  
Green+  
Green-  
Video+  
Video-  
Luma (Y)+  
Luma (Y)-  
White-blue  
Orange  
White-blue  
Green  
Mono audio-  
RS-232-  
White-brown White-brown Blue+/H. sync+ Reserved  
Brown Brown Blue-/H. sync-  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Insert Twisted  
Pair Wires  
RJ-45  
NOTE: If you are using Enhanced Skew-Free A/V cable, use the TIA/EIA T568A standard only.  
Connector  
Figure 5. TP Cable Termination  
NOTE: Enhanced Skew-free A/V cable is not recommended for Ethernet/LAN  
applications. This cable is specially designed for compatibility with the  
Extron Twisted Pair products that are wired using the TIA/EIA 568A  
standard.  
The green, brown, and blue pairs of this cable have virtually identical  
lengths and should be used to transmit the RGB signals.  
The orange pair of this cable has a different length and should not be used  
to transmit the RGB signals..  
b Local Inputs (VGA) connectors — Connect analog computer-  
RGB  
video (RGB) sources to these 15-pin HD female connectors.  
NOTES: The video that is input on this connector, when it is tied to a TP output,  
is converted to same type of the proprietary TP signal that is output by  
the MTP 15HD transmitters. This allows you to eliminate some of the  
transmitters in your system.  
When either the input or output of a tie is local (VGA), Extron  
recommends that the MTP output or input be connected by a minimum  
of 25 feet (7.5 m) of TP cable to prevent overpeaking.  
The matrix switchers can also input and switch HD component video,  
component video, S-video, or composite video by using the appropriate  
adapters and the pins show in figure 6. No configuration of the switcher  
is required for component or other non-RGB video formats.  
Component  
Signal  
S-video  
Signal  
Composite  
Signal  
10  
5
1
6
Pin  
1
R-Y  
Y
Chroma (C)  
Luma (Y)  
Video 2*  
Video  
2
3
15  
11  
B-Y  
Video 3*  
Female  
4-5  
6
R-Y return  
Y return  
Chroma return Video 2 return*  
7
Luma return  
Video return  
8
B-Y return  
Video 3 return*  
9-15  
* You can input and output additional, genlocked, composite video on these pins.  
NOTE: Input only sync signals, no video signals, on the sync pins (13 and 14).  
Figure 6. Other Video Formats on a VGA Connector  
MTPX Plus Series • Installation  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
c Audio Inputs (local audio) connectors — Connect balanced or  
unbalanced stereo audio inputs to these 3.5 mm, 5-pole captive screw  
connectors. Connectors are included with each switcher, but you must  
supply the audio cable. See figure 7 to wire a connector for the appropriate  
input type and impedance level. Use the supplied tie-wrap to strap the audio cable to  
the extended tail of the connector. High impedance is generally over 800 ohms.  
Tip  
Sleeve  
Tip  
Ring  
Sleeve (s)  
Tip  
Sleeve  
Tip  
Ring  
Balanced Stereo Input  
Unbalanced Stereo Input  
Do not tin the wires!  
(high impedance)  
(high impedance)  
Figure 7. Captive Screw Connector Wiring for Audio Inputs  
CAUTIONS: The length of exposed wires is critical. The ideal length is 3/16 inch  
(5 mm).  
If the stripped section of wire is longer than 3/16 inch, the  
exposed wires may touch, causing a short circuit.  
If the stripped section of wire is shorter than 3/16 inch, wires can  
be easily pulled out even if tightly fastened by the captive screws.  
The captive screw audio connector can easily be inadvertently plugged  
partially into one receptacle and partially into an adjacent receptacle.  
This misconnection could damage the audio output circuits. Ensure  
that the connector is plugged fully and only into the desired input or  
output.  
A mono audio connector consists of a tip and sleeve. A stereo audio connector consists  
of a tip, ring and sleeve. See figure 8 to identify the tip, ring, and sleeve parts of the  
connector when you are making connections for the switcher from existing audio  
cables. The ring, tip, and sleeve wires are also shown on the captive screw audio  
connector diagrams, figure 7 and figure 10.  
Tip (+)  
Tip (+)  
Ring (-)  
Sleeve (  
)
Sleeve (  
)
3.5 mm Stereo Plug Connector  
RCA Connector  
(balanced)  
Figure 8. Typical Audio Connectors  
The audio level for each input can be individually set via the front panel or remote  
control to ensure that the level on the output does not vary from input to input (see  
Viewing and Adjusting the Input Audio Level“ in the “Operation” section).  
You can also use SIS commands (see the “Programming Guide” section), the Matrix  
Switchers Control Program (see the “Matrix Software“ section), or the HTML pages  
(see the “HTML Operation” section).  
LOCAL  
d Input Select switches (switchers other than the  
ON  
MTPX Plus 128) — For inputs 1 through 3 (matrix sizes 1616 and smaller,  
1
2
3
RJ - 45  
INPUT SELECT  
excluding the MTPX Plus 128) or inputs 1 through 6 (matrix sizes 1632 and  
larger), set these DIP switches to the Local (up) position to select the local  
(RGB video and audio) input. Set the DIP switches to the RJ-45 (down) position  
to select the MTP input.  
LOCAL  
RJ-45  
MTPX Plus Series • Installation  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
RS-232 Output Inserts  
e RS-232 Output Insert connectors — For bidirectional RS-232 data that is routed  
to a specific (unswitchable) TP output, connect a serial device to one of these 3.5 mm,  
3-pole captive screw connectors. Figure 9 shows how to wire the connectors.  
Tx Rx  
RS-232  
Device  
Bidirectional  
Transmit (Tx)  
Receive (Rx)  
Transmit (Tx)  
Receive (Rx)  
Do not tin the wires!  
Ground (  
)
Ground (  
)
Figure 9. RS-232 Output Insert Wiring  
CAUTION: The length of exposed wires is critical (see the CAUTIONS on page 14 for  
details).  
For the RS-232 Output Insert to be available on the TP output, the insert must be  
enabled via an SIS command (see the “Programming Guide” section), the Matrix  
Switchers Control Program (see the “Matrix Software“ section), or an MTPX Plus  
HTML page (see the “HTML Operation” section).  
Each RS-232 output insertion is dedicated to the output with that number; for example,  
RS-232 Output Insert 1 is always routed to the Output 1 TP connector (when enabled  
as described in the note above), RS-232 Output Insert 2 is routed to the Output 2 TP  
connector, and so on.  
NOTES: When an RS-232 output insert is enabled, any content on the  
audio/RS-232 wire pair for the TP input tied to that output is disabled.  
The switch time for the RS-232 output insert is 50 ms.  
MTPX Plus Series • Installation  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Signal Outputs  
f Outputs (MTP) connectors — Connect the TP inputs of compatible MTP or VTR  
receivers to these RJ-45 female connectors.  
See the Inputs connector (item ) in the “Signal inputs” section, for detailed pin  
assignments for the RJ-45 connectors.  
CAUTION: Do not connect this device to a computer data or telecommunications  
network.  
NOTE: For best results, use a cable length of at least 25 feet (7.5 m) between the  
TP output connector and the receiver.  
g Local Outputs (VGA) connector(s) — Connect one or two RGBHV video displays  
to these 15-pin HD female connectors for each output.  
Matrix sizes 1616 and smaller (excluding the MTPX Plus 128) have one local video  
output.  
Matrix sizes 1632 and larger and the MTPX Plus 128 have two local video outputs.  
These outputs are always outputs 1 and 2, with the same inputs tied to them as to  
TP outputs 1 and 2.  
NOTES: The video that is output on this (these) connector(s) is converted from  
the tied proprietary TP input signal or the local (VGA) input. This feature  
allows you duplicates of output(s) 1 (and 2) while eliminating the need  
for extra receivers.  
When either the output or input of a tie is local (VGA), Extron  
recommends that the MTP input or output be connected by a minimum  
of 25 feet (7.5 m) of TP cable to prevent overpeaking.  
This connector can also output HD component video, component video,  
S-video, or composite video, using the appropriate adapters, if that is  
the video format that was input. See figure 6 on page 13 to identify the  
pins to use for the various video formats. Also, set the output to no sync  
processing (see the Local video output sync polarity SIS commands on  
page 83.  
MTPX Plus Series • Installation  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
h Mono Audio (local audio) outputs — Connect audio devices, such  
as an audio amplifier or powered speakers, to these four or eight 3.5 mm,  
5-pole captive screw connectors. These connectors output the selected  
unamplified, mono line level audio. See figure 10 to wire an output  
connector. Use the supplied tie-wrap to strap the audio cable to the extended tail of the  
connector.  
Tip  
Ring  
Sleeve(s)  
Tip  
Ring  
Mono Output  
Do not tin the wires!  
Figure 10. Captive Screw Connector Wiring for Audio Output  
CAUTIONS: For unbalanced audio, connect the sleeves to the ground contact.  
DO NOT connect the sleeves to the negative (-) contacts.  
The length of exposed wires is critical (see the CAUTIONS on page 14  
for details).  
Matrix sizes 1616 and smaller have four local audio outputs.  
Matrix sizes 1632 and larger have eight local audio outputs.  
These outputs are always outputs 1 through 4 (or 8), with the same inputs tied to them  
as to TP outputs 1 through 4 (or 8).  
NOTES: The audio that is output on this (these) connector(s) is converted from  
the tied proprietary TP input signal or the local audio input. This feature  
allows you duplicates of the outputs while eliminating the need for extra  
receivers.  
When an input that is configured as RS-232 is switched to a local audio  
output, the output is muted to prevent RS-232 noise on the audio  
output.  
The volume level for each local output can be individually set via the front panel or  
remote control (see the “Operation” section, the “Programming Guide” section, the  
Matrix Software“ section, and the “HTML Operation” section).  
By default, the audio ties follow the video ties. Audio breakaway, which can be activated  
via the front panel or under remote control, allows you to select from any one of the  
audio input sources and route it separately from its corresponding video source (see the  
Operation” section, the “Programming Guide” section, the “Matrix Software“  
section, and the “HTML Operation” section).  
MTPX Plus Series • Installation  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Remote Connection  
Connect a host device, such as a computer, touch panel control, or RS-232 capable PDA to  
the switcher via the remote port of your switcher.  
NOTE: The port can operate at 9600, 19200, 38400, or 115200 baud rates. Models  
other than the MTPX Plus 128 can support either the RS-232 or RS-422 serial  
communication protocol (see “Selecting the Rear Panel Remote Port  
Protocol and Baud Rate” in the “Operation” section to configure the Remote  
port from the front panel).  
If desired, connect an MKP 2000 or MKP 3000 remote control panel to the Remote  
connector of the switcher. Refer to the MKP 2000 Remote Control Panel User Guide or the  
MKP 3000 Remote Control Panel User Guide for details.  
i Remote (RS-232) connector (MTPX Plus 128) — A 3-pin captive screw connector  
for serial RS-232 control (see figure 11). Use the supplied tie-wrap to strap the serial  
cable to the extended tail of the connector.  
RS-232  
Pin Function  
TX Transmit data  
RX Receive data  
Tx Rx  
Gnd Signal ground  
Controlling  
Device  
Do not tin the wires!  
Bidirectional  
Ground (  
)
Ground (  
)
Receive (Rx)  
Transmit (Tx)  
Receive (Rx)  
Transmit (Tx)  
NOTE: Cross the Tx and Rx lines once between the source and the target.  
Figure 11. MTPX Plus 128 Remote Connector  
CAUTION: The length of exposed wires is critical (see the CAUTIONS on page 14 for  
details).  
NOTE: This port is hardwired for RS-232 only.  
j Remote connector (all other models) — A 9-pin D connector for serial RS-232 or  
RS-422 control (see figure 12).  
Pin RS-232Function  
RS-422 Function  
Not used  
TX– Transmit data (–)  
RX– Receive data (–)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Not used  
TX Transmit data  
RX Receive data  
1
5
6
9
Not used  
Not used  
Gnd Signal ground Gnd Signal ground  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
Not used  
RX+ Receive data (+)  
TX+ Transmit data (+)  
Not used  
Figure 12. Remote Connector for all Other Models  
See the “Programming Guide” section for definitions of the SIS commands (ASCII  
commands to control the switcher via this connector) and the “Matrix Software”  
section for details on how to install and use the control software.  
MTPX Plus Series • Installation  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ethernet Connection  
NOTE: This port and TP cable carries control signals, not the video, audio, serial signals  
carried by the RJ-45 (item ).  
k LAN port — If desired, for IP control of the switcher, connect the switcher to a PC or  
to an Ethernet LAN via this RJ-45 connector. You can use a PC to control  
the networked switcher with SIS commands from anywhere in the world.  
You can also control the switcher from a PC that is running the Extron  
Matrix Switchers Control Program or has downloaded HTML pages from  
the switcher.  
Ethernet connection indicators — The Link and Activity LEDs indicate  
the status of the Ethernet connection. The Link LED indicates that the  
switcher is properly connected to an Ethernet LAN. This LED should light  
steadily. The Activity LED indicates transmission of data packets on the  
RJ-45 connector. This LED should flicker as the switcher communicates.  
Cabling  
It is vital that your Ethernet cables be the correct cable type, and that they be properly  
terminated. Ethernet links use Category (CAT) 5e or CAT 6, unshielded twisted pair (UTP)  
or shielded twisted pair (STP) cables, terminated with RJ-45 connectors. Ethernet cables are  
limited to a length of 328 feet (100 m).  
NOTES: Do not use standard telephone cables. Telephone cables do not support  
Ethernet or Fast Ethernet.  
Do not stretch or bend cables. Transmission errors can occur.  
The cable used depends on your network speed. The switcher supports both 10 Mbps  
(10Base-T — Ethernet) and 100 Mbps (100Base-T — Fast Ethernet), half-duplex and  
full-duplex Ethernet connections.  
10Base-T Ethernet requires CAT 3 UTP or STP cable at minimum.  
100Base-T Fast Ethernet requires CAT 5e UTP or STP cable at minimum.  
RJ-45 connector wiring  
The Ethernet cable can be terminated as a straight-through cable or a crossover cable and  
must be properly terminated for your application (see figure 13).  
Crossover cable — Direct connection between the computer and the switcher  
Patch (straight) cable — Connection of the MTPX Plus switcher to an Ethernet LAN  
Crossover Cable  
Straight-through Cable  
Pins:  
12345678  
End 1  
Wire color  
End 2  
Wire color  
End 1  
Wire color  
End 2  
Wire color  
Pin  
Pin  
1
White-green  
White-orange  
1
White-orange  
White-orange  
2
3
4
5
Green  
Orange  
2
3
4
5
Orange  
Orange  
White-orange  
Blue  
White-green  
Blue  
White-green  
Blue  
White-green  
Blue  
White-blue  
White-blue  
White-blue  
White-blue  
6
7
8
Orange  
Green  
6
7
8
Green  
Green  
White-brown  
Brown  
White-brown  
Brown  
White-brown  
Brown  
White-brown  
Brown  
Insert Twisted  
Pair Wires  
T568A  
T568B  
T568B  
T568B  
A cable that is wired as T568A at one end  
and T568B at the other (Tx and Rx pairs  
reversed) is a "crossover" cable.  
A cable that is wired the same at both ends is  
called a "straight-through" cable, because  
no pin/pair assignments are swapped.  
RJ-45  
Connector  
Figure 13. RJ-45 Connector and Pinout Tables  
MTPX Plus Series • Installation  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reset Button  
l Reset button — The Reset button initiates two levels of reset to the matrix  
RESET  
switcher. For two different reset levels, press and hold the button while the  
switcher is running or while you power up the switcher.  
See “Rear Panel Operations” in the “Operation” section for details.  
Rear panel (mode 5) system reset — Press and hold the Reset button until the Reset  
LED blinks three times (approximately 9 seconds), then release the button and push it  
again. This reset clears all ties and presets and resets all audio gains to 0 dB.  
Hard reset — Press and hold the Reset button while powering up the switcher to  
perform all of the mode 5 reset functions and restore the switcher to the default factory  
conditions.  
NOTE: Hard reset does not clear the current configuration.  
Power Connection  
m AC power connector — Plug a standard IEC power cord into this connector to  
connect the switcher to a 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50 or 60 Hz power source.  
WARNING: The power connector is wired double pole with neutral fusing.  
Front Panel Configuration Port  
This front panel configuration port serves a similar communications function as the rear  
panel Remote port, but it is easier to access than the rear port after the matrix switcher has  
been installed and cabled.  
NOTES: The Configuration port is independent of the rear panel Remote port and is  
not affected by changes to the protocol of the rear panel port.  
A front panel Configuration port connection and a rear panel Remote port  
connection can both be active at the same time.  
Figure 14 shows the Configuration port for the various MTPX Plus models.  
All other MTPX Plus models  
MTPX Plus 128  
CONTROL  
I/O  
I
N
P
U
T
ESC  
AUDIO  
ENTER  
PRESET  
VIEW  
VIDEO  
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
CONFIG  
O
U
T
P
U
T
CONFIG  
MTPX PLUS SERIES SWITCHER  
14  
15  
Figure 14. Front Panel Configuration Port  
n Configuration port (MTPX Plus 128 only) — A mini USB B port.  
o Configuration port — A 2.5 mm mini stereo jack. The optional 9-pin D to 2.5 mm  
mini jack TRS RS-232 cable, part number 70-335-01 (see figure 15, on the next page),  
can be used for this connection.  
MTPX Plus Series • Installation  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6 feet  
(1.8 m)  
Part #70-335-01  
1
5
6
9
Tip  
Ring  
Sleeve (Gnd)  
9-pin D  
Connection  
TRS Plug  
Pin 2  
Pin 3  
Pin 5  
Computer's RX line  
Computer's TX line  
Computer's signal ground  
Tip  
Ring  
Sleeve  
Figure 15. Optional 9-pin TRS RS-232 cable  
NOTE: The stereo jack Configuration port (item ) protocol can be changed  
o
under SIS command control only (see the Set serial port parameters  
SIS Command, in the “Programming Guide” section to configure all ports  
under SIS control).  
This port is RS-232 only, with its default protocols as follows:  
9600 baud  
1 stop bit  
no parity  
8 data bits  
no flow control  
NOTE: The maximum distances from the matrix switcher to the controlling device  
can vary up to 200 feet (61 m). Factors such as cable gauge, baud rates,  
environment, and output levels (from the switcher and the controlling  
device) all affect transmission distance. Distances of about 50 feet (15 m)  
are typically not a problem. In some cases the matrix switcher may be  
capable of serial communications via RS-232 up to 250 feet (76 m) away.  
MTPX Plus Series • Installation  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Operation  
This section describes the front panel operation of the MTPX Plus Matrix Switcher, including:  
Front Panel Controls and Indicators  
The front panel controls (see figure 16 through figure 18) are grouped into two sets. The  
input and output buttons, and , are grouped on the left side of the control panel. The  
a b  
control buttons and video/audio (I/O) selection buttons,  
right side of the panel.  
through , are grouped on the  
c
h
NOTES: While the number of inputs and outputs varies, depending on the size of the  
matrix, there are only three front panel arrangements:  
12 input buttons by 8 output buttons (see figure 16)  
16 input buttons by 16 output buttons (see figure 17)  
32 input buttons by 32 output buttons (see figure 18)  
On smaller matrix switchers, the larger-numbered buttons are not used for  
input and output selection, although they are used to select and indicate  
preset numbers, indicate the input audio level, and indicate the output audio  
volume.  
The illuminated pushbuttons can be labeled with text, graphics, or both. The buttons  
can be set to provide amber background illumination all the time, or the background  
illumination can be turned off (see “Background Illumination”, on page 61). The buttons  
blink or are lit at full intensity (depending on the operation) when selected.  
1
I
CONTROL  
I/O  
N
P
U
T
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
11  
12  
10  
9
VIEW  
ESC  
AUDIO  
ENTER  
PRESET  
VIDEO  
O
U
T
P
U
T
CONFIG  
1
MTPX PLUS SERIES  
MTP MATRIX SWITCHER  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 16. Front Panel, MTPX Plus 128  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1
INPUTS  
1
2
3
4
6
7
9
10 11 12  
14 15 16  
5
13  
8
CONTROL  
I/O  
ESC  
AUDIO  
ENTER  
PRESET  
VIEW  
VIDEO  
CONFIG  
1
2
3
4
6
7
9 10 11 12  
14 15 16  
5
13  
8
OUTPUTS  
MTPX PLUS SERIES  
MTP MATRIX SWITCHER  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 17. Front Panel, MTPX Plus 816, 168, 1616  
1
I
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
5
21  
5
N
P
U
T
S
17 18 19 20  
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
O
U
T
P
U
T
CONTROL  
I/O  
1
2
3
4
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
ENTER  
PRESET  
VIEW  
ESC  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
CONFIG  
17 18 19 20  
22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
21  
S
MTPX PLUS SERIES  
MTP MATRIX SWITCHER  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 18. Front Panel, MTPX Plus 1632, 3216, 3232  
NOTES: Input and output buttons cannot select an input number or output number  
that is higher than your matrix size supports. Buttons numbered higher than  
your matrix size do have other functions as described in the following pages.  
See “Front Panel Operations” for detailed descriptions of the following  
operations.  
a Input buttons — See page 25.  
b Output buttons — See page 25.  
c Enter button — See page 26.  
d Preset button — See page 27.  
e View button — See page 27.  
f Esc button — See page 27.  
g Video button — See page 28.  
h Audio button — See page 28.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Input and Output Buttons  
NOTE: See “Front Panel Operations” for detailed descriptions of the following  
operations.  
Primary functions  
Action  
Indication  
Select input or output for tie being created.  
Blink: potential tie/untie.  
Lit: current tie  
Amber: video and audio tie  
Green: video only tie  
Red: audio only tie  
through {highest numbered input or  
output button}  
1
2 3  
Secondary functions  
I/O grouping Action 1  
Input 1 and Output 1:  
Select I/O Group mode.  
Action 2  
Assign an input or output to the selected group.  
Lit: Input or output is assigned to the selected group.  
Select a preset in Preset mode.  
Indication  
Action  
Indication  
Lit: A preset has already been saved to this location.  
Blink: Preset location is selected to be saved.  
Action  
Input buttons: Select the input for audio gain or attenuation adjustment.  
Input buttons lit: Input audio selected for adjustment.  
Indication  
Indication  
Output buttons lit or blinking: Indicate the input gain or attenuation level.  
Output buttons: Select the output for audio volume adjustment.  
Output buttons lit: Output audio is selected for adjustment.  
Indication  
Indication  
Action  
Input buttons lit or blinking: Indicated the output volume level.  
Output buttons: Press and hold to mute or unmute the audio or RS-232 output.  
Output buttons blinking: Output audio or RS-232 is muted.  
Indication  
Action  
Input buttons: Toggle between audio or RS-232 as the pins 3 and 6 input.  
Indication  
Action  
Input buttons lit: RS-232  
Unlit: audio  
Input 1 and Input 2 buttons:  
Toggle between background  
illumination or buttons unlit.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
a Input buttons — The input buttons have one primary function () and six secondary  
functions (•):  
Select and identify an input.  
(Input 1 only) With the Output 1 button, select I/O Group mode.  
Assign an input to the selected group in I/O Group mode and indicate its  
assignment.  
Select a preset.  
Display the output volume level.  
Select and identify the audio/RS-232 wire pair as audio (unlit) or RS-232 (lit) in Serial  
Port and Audio/RS-232 Input Configuration mode.  
(Input 1 and Input 2 only) Toggle background illumination of the buttons on and  
off.  
b Output buttons — The output buttons have one primary function () and five  
secondary functions (•):  
Select and identify an output.  
(Output 1 only) With the Input 1 button, select I/O Group mode.  
Assign an output to the selected group in I/O Group mode and indicate its  
assignment.  
Select a preset.  
Mute the audio or RS-232 output..  
Display the audio level of the selected input.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Control Buttons and LEDs  
NOTE: See “Front Panel Operations” for detailed descriptions of the following  
operations.  
Primary functions  
Action  
Save changes  
Select Preset mode Select View mode  
Cancel/Escape  
Indication Blink: Save needed  
Blink: Save preset  
Lit: Recall preset  
View mode  
selected  
Flashes once  
ESC  
ENTER  
PRESET  
VIEW  
Secondary functions  
I/O grouping Action/  
indication  
Select and indicate Select and indicate Select and indicate Select and indicate  
group 1  
group 2  
group 3  
group 4  
Port and input Action 1  
Select Configuration mode.  
configuration  
Action 2  
Select 9600 baud  
Select 19200 baud Select 38400 baud  
Select 115200  
baud  
Indication Blink: 9600 baud  
Blink: 19200 baud Blink: 38400 baud Blink: 115200 baud  
Action  
With Video and  
Audio, select Lock  
mode 2 or toggle  
between mode 0  
and mode 0.  
Audio  
Action  
In Audio mode,  
decrease input level increase input level  
In Audio mode,  
c Enter button — The Enter button has two primary functions () and four secondary  
functions (•):  
Saves configuration or preset changes that you make on the front panel. To create a  
simple configuration:  
Specify video, audio, or both (see I/O buttons [item g] and [item h]).  
Press the desired input button (item a).  
Press the desired output button or buttons (item b).  
Press the Enter button.  
Indicates that a potential tie has been created but not saved.  
In the I/O Group mode, selects group 1 and indicates the selection.  
With the Preset, View, and Esc buttons, selects Serial Port and Audio/RS-232 Input  
Configuration mode.  
Selects 9600 baud for the rear panel Remote port in Serial Port and Audio/RS-232  
Input Configuration mode and indicates the selection.  
With the Video and Audio buttons, selects front panel security Lock mode 2 or  
toggles between mode 0 (unlocked) and mode 2.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
d Preset button The Preset button has two primary functions () and three  
secondary functions (•):  
Activates Save Preset mode to save a configuration as a preset and Recall Preset  
mode to activate a previously-defined preset.  
Blinks when Save Preset mode is active and lights steadily when Recall Preset mode  
is active.  
In the I/O Group mode, selects group 2 and indicates the selection.  
With the Enter, View, and Esc buttons, selects Serial Port and Audio/RS-232 Input  
Configuration mode.  
Selects 19200 baud for the rear panel Remote port in Serial Port and Audio/RS-232  
Input Configuration mode and indicates the selection.  
e View (<) button — The View (<) button has one primary function () and five  
secondary functions (•):  
Select and indicate View-only mode, which displays the current configuration.  
NOTE: View-only mode also provides a way to mute and unmute the audio or  
RS-232 outputs.  
In the I/O Group mode, selects group 3 and indicates the selection.  
Decreases the audio level of the selected input.  
Decreases the volume of the selected output.  
With the Enter, Preset, and Esc buttons, selects Serial Port and Audio/RS-232 Input  
Configuration mode.  
Selects 38400 baud for the rear panel Remote port in Serial Port and Audio/RS-232  
Input Configuration mode, and indicates the selection.  
f Esc (>) button — The Esc (>) button has two primary functions () and five secondary  
functions (•):  
Cancels operations or selections in progress and resets the front panel button  
indicators.  
NOTE: The Esc (>) button does not reset the current configuration, the Video  
button and Audio selection button, any presets, or any audio gain or  
attenuation or volume settings.  
Flashes once to indicate that the escape function has been activated.  
In the I/O Group mode, selects group 4 and indicates the selection.  
Increases the audio level of the selected input.  
Increases the volume of the selected output.  
With the Enter, Preset, and View buttons, selects Serial Port and Audio/RS-232 Input  
Configuration mode.  
Selects 115200 baud for the rear panel Remote port in Serial Port and Audio/RS-232  
Input Configuration mode and indicates the selection.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
I/O Controls  
NOTE: See “Front Panel Operations” for detailed descriptions of the following  
operations.  
Primary functions  
Action  
Select video  
Select audio  
Indication  
Green: selected  
Red: selected  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
Secondary functions  
Action 1  
With Enter, select Lock mode 2 or toggle  
between mode 0 and mode 2.  
Action 2  
Select Lock mode 1 or toggle between  
mode 2 and mode 1.  
Action 1:  
Action  
Perform a system reset.  
Select RS-232.  
Select RS-422  
Blink: selected  
Indication  
Action  
Blink: selected  
Audio  
Select Audio mode.  
g Video button — The Video button has one primary function () and four secondary  
functions (•):  
Selects and deselects video for a configuration that is being created or viewed and  
lights green to indicate that video is available for configuring or for viewing.  
With the Enter button and Audio button, selects between front panel locks  
(Lock mode 2 and Lock mode 0).  
With the Audio button, selects between front panel locks (Lock mode 2 and  
Lock mode 1).  
With the Audio button, commands the front panel system reset.  
Switchers other than MTPX Plus 128 — Selects the RS-232 protocol for the rear  
panel Remote port in Serial Port and Audio/RS-232 Input Configuration mode and  
indicates the selection.  
h Audio button — The Audio button has one primary function () and five secondary  
functions (•):  
Selects and deselects audio for a configuration that is being created or viewed and  
lights to indicate that audio is available for configuration or viewing.  
Selects the Audio mode, in which you can adjust the input audio level and the  
output audio volume.  
With the Enter button and Video button, selects between front panel locks  
(Lock mode 2 and Lock mode 0)  
With the Video button, selects between front panel locks (Lock mode 2 and  
Lock mode 1).  
With the Video button, commands the front panel system reset.  
Switchers other than MTPX Plus 128 — Selects the RS-422 protocol for the rear  
panel Remote port in Serial Port and Audio/RS-232 Input Configuration mode and  
indicates the selection.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Button Icons  
The numbered translucent covers on the input and output pushbuttons can be removed and  
replaced to insert labels behind the covers.  
Input and output labels can be created easily with the Extron Button-Label Generator  
software, which is shipped with every Extron matrix switcher. Each input and output can be  
labeled with names, alphanumeric characters, or color bitmaps for easy and intuitive input  
and output selection (see figure 19). See the “Matrix Software” section for details on  
using the labeling software and the “Reference Information” section for blank labels and  
a procedure for removing and replacing the translucent covers.  
I
10  
13  
15  
N
P
U
T
VCR  
VTG 200  
Computer  
Computer  
Document  
Camera  
28 29 30 31 32  
S
VD  
Figure 19. Sample Button Icons  
Front Panel Operations  
The following sections detail the power-up process and then provide sample procedures for  
the following actions:  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Definitions  
The following Extron matrix switcher terms are used throughout this manual:  
Tie — An input-to-output connection  
Set of ties — An input tied to two or more outputs.  
NOTE: An output can never be tied to more than one input.  
Configuration — One or more ties or one or more sets of ties  
Current configuration — The configuration that is currently active in the switcher (also  
called configuration 0)  
Global memory preset — A configuration that has been stored. Up to 32 global memory  
presets can be stored in memory. Preset locations are assigned to the input buttons and  
(where necessary) output buttons. When a preset is retrieved from memory, it becomes the  
current configuration.  
All models have 32 presets. On the MTPX 128 Plus, which has fewer than 32 input and  
output buttons, preset numbers that are too high to be available from the front panel are  
still accessible under remote or Ethernet control.  
Room — A subset of outputs that are logically related to each other, as determined by the  
operator. The switchers support up to 10 rooms, each of which can consist of from 1 to 16  
outputs.  
Room memory preset — A configuration consisting of outputs in a single room that  
has been stored. When a room preset is retrieved from memory, it becomes the current  
configuration.  
Power  
Apply power by connecting the power cord between the switcher and an AC source. The  
switcher performs a self-test that flashes the front panel button indicators red, green, and  
amber and then turns them off. An error-free power-up self-test sequence leaves all input,  
output, and control buttons either unlit or showing background illumination and the Video  
button and the Audio button lit.  
The current configuration and all presets are saved in non-volatile memory. When power is  
applied, the most recent configuration is retrieved. The previous presets remain intact.  
If an error occurs during the self-test, the switcher locks up and does not operate. If your  
switcher locks up on power-up, call the Extron S3 Sales and Technical Support Hotline. See  
the end of this guide for the phone number in your region of the world.  
Front Panel Security Lockouts  
In the procedural descriptions that follow, it is assumed that the switcher is in Lock mode 0  
(fully unlocked). The following two Lock modes are also available:  
Lock mode 1 — All changes are locked from the front panel (except for setting Lock  
mode 2). Some functions can be viewed.  
Lock mode 2 — Advanced features are locked and can be viewed only. Basic functions  
are unlocked.  
NOTE: The switcher is shipped from the factory in Lock mode 2. See “Setting the  
Front Panel Locks (Executive Modes)” on page 59 for a detailed list of basic  
and advanced functions and the procedure to set the various front panel locks.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Creating a Configuration  
The current configuration can be changed using the front panel buttons. Change the current  
configuration as follows:  
1. Press the Esc button to clear any input button indicators, output button indicators, or  
control button indicators that may be lit.  
2. Select video, audio, or both for configuration by pressing the Video button and Audio  
button as necessary.  
3. Select the desired input and output(s) by pressing the input and output buttons.  
Input buttons and output buttons light or blink:  
Amber to indicate video and audio ties  
Green to indicate video only ties  
Red to indicate audio only ties  
To indicate potential ties, output buttons blink the appropriate color when an input  
is selected.  
To indicate current ties, output buttons light steadily the appropriate color when an  
input is selected.  
To clear unwanted outputs, press and release the associated lit output buttons. To  
indicate potential unties, output buttons blink the appropriate color when an output  
is deselected but not untied from the input.  
4. Press and release the Enter button to accept the tie or to break an existing tie.  
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 to create or clear additional ties until the desired configuration  
is complete.  
NOTES: Only one video input and one audio input can be tied to an output.  
If a tie is made between an input and an output, and the selected output  
was previously tied to another input, the older tie is broken in favor of  
the newer tie.  
If an input with no tie is selected, only the button for the selected input  
lights.  
When the Video button and the Audio button are lit, if an input with an  
audio tie but no video tie is selected, the button for the input and the  
button for the output light the appropriate color (amber, green, or red).  
As each input and output is selected, the associated output button blinks  
the appropriate color to indicate a tentative tie. Buttons for outputs that  
were already tied to the input light the appropriate color steadily. Outputs  
that are already tied can be left on, along with new blinking selections, or  
toggled off by pressing the associated output button.  
If you press the input button for an input that is I/O grouped (see “I/O  
grouping“, on page 39) and then try to select an output in a different  
group, you cannot select the associated output button. The associated  
input button remains lit.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example 1: Create a set of video and audio ties  
1. Clear all selections: Press and release the Esc button.  
Press the Esc button to clear all selections.  
C O N T R O L  
ENTER PRESET  
VIEW  
ESC  
The button flashes once.  
2. Select video and audio for the tie: If necessary, press and release the the Video  
button and the Audio button to light both.  
I / O  
VIDEO AUDIO  
Press the Video button to toggle on and off. Press the Audio button to toggle on and off.  
The button lights green when selected. The button lights red when selected.  
3. Select an input: Press and release the input 5 button.  
Press the button.  
The button lights amber.  
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16  
N
P
U
T
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32  
S
4. Select the outputs: Press and release the output 3, output 4, and output 8 buttons.  
Press the buttons.  
The buttons blink amber to indicate that the selected video and audio inputs  
will be tied to these outputs.  
C O N T R O L  
O
U
1 2 3 4  
5
6
7
8 5 16  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
T
P
U
T
S
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 32  
The Enter button blinks  
green to indicate the need to  
confirm the change.  
NOTE: You can cancel the entire set of ties at this point by pressing and releasing  
the Esc button. The Esc button flashes once.  
5. Confirm the change: Press and release the Enter button.  
Press the Enter button to  
confirm the configuration  
change.  
All input buttons and output buttons  
ENTER  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
The Enter button returns to  
unlit or background  
illumination.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The current configuration (see figure 20) is now:  
Input 5 video and audio are tied to output 3, output 4, and output 8  
Input  
5
3
4
Output  
8
Video  
Audio  
Figure 20. Example 1, Final Configuration  
Example 2: Add a video tie to a set of video and audio ties  
In the following example, a new video tie is added to the current configuration. The example  
shows the front panel indications that result from your actions.  
NOTE: This example assumes that you have performed example 1.  
1. Clear all selections: Press and release the Esc button.  
2. Select video only for the tie: Press and release the Video button and the Audio  
button as necessary to light Video only.  
I / O  
VIDEO AUDIO  
Press the Video button to toggle on and off. Press the Audio button to toggle on and off.  
The button lights green when selected. The button is unlit or background illuminated when deselected.  
3. Select an input: Press and release the Input 5 button.  
Press the button.  
The button lights green to indicate that video  
The Output 3, Output 4, and Output 8 buttons light  
outputs can be tied to or untied from this input.  
green to indicate the video ties created in example 1.  
INPUTS  
2
1
3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
2
1
9
3 4 5 6 7 8  
OUTPUTS  
4. Select the output: Press and release the Output 1 button.  
Press the button.  
The button blinks green to indicate that only the selected video  
input will be tied to this output.  
O
U
C O N T R O L  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16  
T
P
U
T
S
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32  
The Enter button blinks  
green to indicate the need to  
confirm the change.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Confirm the change: Press and release the Enter button.  
Press the Enter button to  
confirm the configuration  
change.  
All input buttons and output buttons  
ENTER  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
The Enter button returns to  
unlit or background  
illumination.  
The current configuration (see figure 21) is now:  
Video — Input 5 video is tied to output 1, output 3, output 4, and output 8.  
Audio — Input 5 audio is tied to output 3, output 4, and output 8.  
Input 5 video tied  
to outputs 1, 3, 4, and 8  
Input 5 audio tied  
to outputs 3, 4, and 8  
Input  
5
1
3
4
Output  
8
Video  
Audio  
Figure 21. Example 2, Final Configuration  
Example 3: Remove a tie from a set of ties  
In the following example, an existing tie is removed from the current configuration. The  
example shows the front panel indications that result from your actions.  
NOTE: This example assumes that you have performed example 1 and example 2.  
1. Clear all selections: Press and release the Esc button.  
2. Select audio only for the tie: Press and release the Video button and the Audio  
button as necessary to light Audio only.  
I / O  
VIDEO AUDIO  
Press the Video button to toggle on and off. Press the Audio button to toggle on and off.  
The button lights red when selected.  
The button is unlit or background illuminated  
when deselected.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Select an input: Press and release the input 5 button.  
Press the button.  
The button lights red.  
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 16  
N
P
U
T
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 32  
S
The Output 3, Output 4, and Output 8 buttons light  
red to indicate the audio ties created in example 1.  
O
U
T
P
U
T
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 16  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 32  
S
The Output 1 button does not light to indicate the tie  
created in example 2 because that tie is video only.  
4. Select the output: Press and release the output 4 button.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
Press the button.  
The button blinks red to indicate the pending change:  
audio input will be untied.  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
The Enter button blinks  
green to indicate the need to  
confirm the change.  
O
U
T
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16  
P
U
T
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32  
S
5. Confirm the change: Press and release the Enter button.  
Press the Enter button to  
confirm the configuration  
change.  
All input buttons and output buttons  
ENTER  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
The Enter button returns to  
unlit or background  
illumination.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The current configuration (see figure 22) is now:  
Video — Input 5 video is tied to output 1, output 3, output 4, and output 8.  
Audio — Input 5 audio is tied to output 3 and output 8.  
Input 5 video tied  
to outputs 1, 3, 4, and 8  
Input 5 audio tied  
to outputs 3 and 8  
Input  
5
1
3
4
Output  
8
Video  
Audio  
Figure 22. Example 3, Final Configuration  
Viewing the Configuration  
The current configuration can be viewed using the front panel buttons. The View-only mode  
prevents inadvertent changes to the current configuration. View-only mode also provides  
a way to mute audio or RS-232 outputs (see “Muting and Unmuting Audio/RS-232  
Outputs” on page 46).  
View the current configuration as follows:  
1. Press the Esc button to clear any input button indications, output button indications, or  
control button indications that may be on.  
2. Press and release the View button. All of the buttons light for outputs that are not tied  
as follows:  
Amber: No tied video or audio input  
Green: No tied video input  
Red: No tied audio input  
If you press an output button for which there are no ties, the output buttons light for all  
outputs without ties.  
3. Select video, audio, or both to view by pressing the Video button, Audio button, or  
both.  
4. Select the desired input or output(s) whose ties you wish to view by pressing the input  
and output buttons.  
NOTES: To see all ties of the current configuration, press and release each input  
and output button, one at a time, with the Video button and the Audio  
button lit.  
When you view video and audio ties, the Video button is lit green and  
the Audio button is lit red. After you select an input or output, the output  
buttons light different colors to show where video and audio ties are not  
the same (audio is broken away). Amber indicates video and audio, green  
indicates video only, and red indicates audio only.  
After 30 seconds of front panel inactivity, View-only mode automatically  
deselects.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example 4: Viewing video and audio (RS-232), audio (RS-232) only,  
and video only ties  
In the following example, we view the video and audio (or RS-232), audio- (or RS-232) only,  
and video-only ties in the current configuration. The steps show the front panel indications  
that result from your action.  
NOTE: This example assumes that you have performed example 1, example 2, and  
1. Clear all selections: Press and release the Esc button.  
2. Select View-only mode: Press and release the View button. The View button lights  
red.  
3. Select video and audio for viewing: Press and release the Video button and the  
Audio button as necessary to light both.  
I / O  
Press the Video button  
to toggle on and off.  
Press the Audio button  
to toggle on and off.  
VIDEO AUDIO  
The button lights  
The button lights red  
green when selected.  
when selected.  
Until you select an input, the buttons for all untied  
outputs light amber if no inputs are tied, green if no  
video inputs are tied (only audio is tied), or red if no  
audio or RS-232 inputs are tied (only video is tied).  
O
U
T
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16  
P
U
T
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32  
S
4. Select an input: Press and release the input 5 button.  
Press the button. It lights amber.  
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 16  
N
P
U
T
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 32  
S
The output buttons for outputs that are tied to Input 5  
light or blink the appropriate color:  
Lit amber for audio and video ties (audio follow)  
Lit green for video ties (audio breakaway)  
Red for audio/RS-232 ties (audio/RS-232 breakaway)  
O
U
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 16  
T
P
U
T
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 32  
S
The output buttons for outputs that are not tied to Input 5 are  
either unlit or background illuminated.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE: You can also view a set of ties by selecting a tied output. Demonstrate this  
as follows:  
Note the number of a lit output button, and then press and release the  
output button for an untied (unlit or background illumination) output.  
Observe that all of the untied outputs light.  
Then press the output button that you noted previously  
Observe that the selected output button, the tied input button (input  
5), and the output buttons light for all of the outputs that are tied to  
the input.  
5. Deselect video: Press and release the Video button.  
Press the button.  
I / O  
The Audio button  
remains lit red to  
indicate that only  
audio is selected.  
The button is unlit or  
background illuminated  
when deselected.  
VIDEO AUDIO  
The output buttons for outputs that are tied to Input 5 light  
red to indicate audio or RS-232 ties (audio breakaway).  
O
U
T
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 5 16  
P
U
T
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 32  
S
The output buttons for outputs that are not tied to Input 5 are  
either unlit or background illuminated.  
6. Toggle audio off and video on: Press and release the Video button and the Audio  
button.  
Press the button.  
Press button.  
I / O  
The button is unlit  
or background  
illuminated when  
deselected.  
The button lights  
green when selected.  
VIDEO AUDIO  
The output buttons for outputs that are tied to Input 5  
light green to indicate video ties (audio breakaway).  
O
U
T
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 5 16  
P
U
T
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 32  
S
The output buttons for outputs that are not tied to Input 5 are  
either unlit or background illuminated.  
If video ties are established for input 5, the output buttons light green for all video  
outputs tied to input 5. If no ties are established for input 5, all output buttons return to  
either unlit or to background illumination.  
7. Exit View-only mode: Press and release the View button  
Press the button.  
All input buttons and output buttons  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
VIEW  
The View button returns to unlit or background illumination.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I/O Grouping  
I/O grouping is a matrix switcher feature that allows you to subdivide the front panel  
controls of the matrix into four smaller functional sub-switchers and limit tie creation using  
the front panel only. Inputs and outputs can be assigned to one of four groups or not  
assigned to any group.  
When you are creating ties on the front panel, inputs and outputs that are assigned to a  
group can be tied only to other outputs and inputs within the same group. For example,  
a front panel operator cannot tie an input that is assigned to group 1 to an output that is  
assigned to group 2. Ungrouped inputs and outputs can be switched to outputs and inputs  
in any group. Ties between groups (an input in group 1 tied to an output in group 2) can be  
created under serial port, USB port, or Ethernet control.  
Suggested applications for the I/O grouping feature include:  
Segregating specific video formats to prevent an input in one video format from being  
inadvertently applied to an output device that supports another video format (see  
Segregating input and output devices that are in separate rooms  
Segregating input and output devices on which you are distributing audio on the audio/  
RS-232 wire pair from those on which you are distributing RS-232 signals.  
Isolating video from being displayed on specific output devices for operational security  
reasons.  
NOTE: All of the equipment in this figure is connected through the appropriate MTP transmitter or receiver.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11  
VSC 700  
SCAN CONVERTER  
FREEZE  
RESET  
MENU  
NEXT  
SIZE  
IR  
N/MAX  
CENTER/PAN/SIZE  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27  
VSC 700  
Projector  
3 input, 4 output  
RGBHV matrix  
Group 1  
Group 2  
Group 3  
Computer #1  
Computer #3  
Input  
24 25 26  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
5
6
Output  
7
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27  
8
Group 3  
Monitor  
4 input, 2 output  
composite video matrix  
3 input, 2 output  
S-video matrix  
INPUTS  
PICTURE ADJUSTMENTS  
BRT/CONT COL/TNT  
ADJUST  
FREEZE  
FREEZE  
RGB  
1
U
N
I
V
E
R
S
A
L
C
O
M
P
O
S
I
T
E
S
-
V
I
D
E
O
SDI  
5
CENTER  
SIZE  
ZOOM  
DETAIL  
MENU  
2
3
4
NEXT  
USP 405  
UNIVERSAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR  
USP 405  
Input  
17 18 19 20  
1
Document Camera  
Input  
21 22 23  
3
Monitor  
Monitor  
Camera #1  
Output  
Output  
2
4
VCR  
DVD  
Group 1  
Group 2  
Camera #4  
Monitor  
Figure 23. I/O Grouping of Incompatible Video Formats  
The I/O groups can be set up on the front panel or by using Remote port, USB port, or LAN  
ports and either the SIS (see the “Programming Guide” section) or the Matrix Switchers  
Control Program (see the “Matrix Software” section.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
You can break audio away from the video for a given input or output (assign video and  
audio to different groups) by isolating only video or only audio using the front panel Video  
and Audio buttons after you select I/O Group mode (between steps 2 and 3, below).  
Audio breakaway across different groups can be confusing when you are operating the  
front panel. Breakaway grouping is not displayed by the Matrix Switchers Control Program,  
HTML pages, or SIS commands; and is not recommended (breakaway ties, once created, are  
displayed).  
Create I/O groups on the front panel as follows:  
NOTE: I/O groups are protected when front panel Lock mode 2 is selected. You can  
view the groups in Lock mode 2, but you cannot change them from the front  
panel (see “Setting the Front Panel Locks (Executive Modes)” on page 59).  
1. Press the Esc button to clear any input buttons, output buttons, or control buttons that  
may be lit.  
2. To enter I/O Group mode, press and hold the Input 1 and Output 1 buttons until the  
input and output buttons light to display the ungrouped inputs and outputs.  
3. Press and release one of the Control buttons to select a group:  
C O N T R O L  
Press the Enter button to select group 1.  
Press the Preset button to select group 2.  
Press the View button to select group 3.  
Press the Esc button to select group 4.  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
Group # 1  
2
3
4
4. Select the desired input or inputs and output or outputs to assign to the group by  
pressing the input and output buttons.  
5. Press and release the Video and Audio button to exit the I/O Group mode, or allow the  
mode to time out after approximately 30 seconds.  
NOTES: Ties between groups (an input in group 1 tied to an output in group 2)  
can be created under serial port, USB port, or Ethernet control.  
Ties that were created before I/O groups were created remain valid, even  
if they include inputs and outputs in different groups.  
Presets can be created under serial port, USB port, or Ethernet control  
that tie inputs and outputs across group boundaries. These presets are  
selectable from the front panel.  
An input or output can be assigned to only one group. If you assign an  
input or output to a group and that input or output is already assigned  
to a different group, the older grouping is discarded in favor of the new  
grouping.  
For I/O groups to have any function, at least two groups must be created.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example 5: Grouping inputs and outputs  
In the following example, several switcher inputs and outputs are assigned to groups. The  
steps show the front panel indications that result from your action.  
1. Clear all selections: Press and release the Esc button.  
2. Enter I/O Group mode: Simultaneously press and hold the Input 1 and Output 1  
buttons for approximately 2 seconds and then release the buttons.  
Release the Input 1 button  
and Output 1 button.  
Ungrouped input and  
output buttons light.  
I
I
1
2
5 16  
17 18 11 32  
5 16  
17 18 11 32  
N
P
U
T
S
1
2
5 16  
17 18 11 32  
5 16  
17 18 11 32  
N
P
U
T
S
Press and hold  
the Input 1 button  
and Output 1 button.  
2 seconds  
O
U
T
P
U
T
O
U
T
P
U
T
1
2
1
2
S
S
3. Select group 1: Press and release the Enter button.  
Press the button.  
The button lights amber to indicate the selection.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
Group # 1  
2
3
4
NOTE: I/O groups are protected when front panel Lock mode 2 is selected. You  
can view the groups in Lock mode 2, but you cannot change them from the  
page 59).  
If front panel Lock mode 2 is selected and you try to perform step 4, the  
actions are ignored and the Enter, Video, and Audio buttons flash.  
4. Assign inputs and outputs to group 1:  
a. Press and release the Input 1 through 4 buttons.  
Press the buttons.  
The selected buttons light green.  
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16  
N
P
U
T
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32  
S
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
b. Press and release the Output 1 through 4 buttons.  
Press the buttons.  
The selected buttons light green.  
O
U
T
P
U
T
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32  
S
5. Select group 2: Press and release the Preset button.  
Press the button.  
The button lights amber to indicate the selection.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
Group # 1  
2
3
4
6. Assign inputs and outputs to group 2:  
a. Press and release the Input 5 through 8 buttons.  
Press and release the buttons.  
The selected buttons light green.  
I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 15 16  
N
P
U
T
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 32  
S
b. Press and release the Output 5 through 8 buttons.  
Press and release the buttons.  
The selected buttons light green.  
I
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 15 16  
N
P
U
T
S
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 32  
7. Exit I/O Group mode: Simultaneously press and release the Video button and Audio  
button.  
NOTE: If you do nothing for approximately 30 seconds, the front panel times out  
and the switcher exits I/O Group mode:  
Group 1 consists of inputs 1 through 4 and outputs 1 through 4.  
Group 2 consists of inputs 5 through 8 and outputs 5 through 8.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Presets  
The current configuration (configuration 0) can be saved as a preset in any one of 32 preset  
memory addresses. All 32 presets are assigned to the input buttons and (where necessary)  
output buttons and are available to be either saved or retrieved from the front panel.  
Up to 20 (MTPX Plus 128) or all 32 (all other models) presets can be selected from the front  
panel to be either saved or retrieved. When a preset is retrieved from memory, it becomes  
the current configuration.  
NOTES: Only the audio and video ties are stored and recalled; audio gain settings are  
not saved, and they do not change when a preset is recalled.  
Presets cannot be viewed from the front panel unless they are recalled as  
the current configuration. Presets can be viewed using the Extron Matrix  
Switchers Control Program (see the “Matrix Software” section).  
The current configuration and all presets are stored in non-volatile memory.  
When power is removed and restored, the current configuration is still active  
and all presets are retained.  
When a preset is recalled, it replaces the current configuration, which is lost  
unless it is also stored as a preset. The recalled preset overwrites all of the  
current configuration ties in favor of the preset configuration ties.  
All models have 32 presets; on the MTPX Plus 128, preset numbers that are  
too high to be available from the front panel are still accessible under serial  
port, USB, or Ethernet control.  
Figure 24 shows the presets associated with the three input and output  
button configurations for the MTPX Plus matrix switchers.  
MTPX Plus 128 (12 x 8 matrix size)  
Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
I
N
P
U
T
Input  
buttons  
1
1
2
2
3
3
11  
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
12  
8
8
10  
9
O
U
T
P
U
T
Output  
buttons  
Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset  
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20  
16 x 32, 32 x 16, and 32 x 32 matrix sizes  
Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
N
P
U
T
S
Input  
buttons  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
8 x 16, 16 x 8, and 16 x 16 matrix sizes  
Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
INPUTS  
Input  
buttons  
2
1
3 4 5 6 7  
3 4 5 6 7  
10  
12 13  
12 13  
14  
16  
8 9  
11  
15  
Output  
buttons  
2
1
10  
14  
16  
8 9  
OUTPUTS  
11  
15  
Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset Preset  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
Figure 24. Preset Locations  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example 6: Saving a preset  
In the following an example, the current configuration is saved as a preset. The example  
shows the front panel indications that result from your actions.  
1. Clear all selections: Press and release the Esc button.  
2. Select Save Preset mode: Press and hold the Preset button for approximately  
2 seconds until it blinks.  
Preset Assigned  
I
Press and hold the Preset button until it blinks.  
1 2 3 4 15 16  
N
P
U
T
S
PRESET  
PRESET  
2 seconds  
All input buttons with assigned  
17 18 19 20 31 32  
presets light red.  
If you then save the configuration  
to a lit preset number, the  
configuration data at that preset  
location will be overwritten.  
No Preset Assigned  
3. Select the preset: Press and release the input button or output button for the desired  
preset.  
C O N T R O L  
Press the button.  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
The button blinks to indicate that this  
preset number is selected but not saved.  
The Enter button blinks to  
indicate the need to save  
the preset.  
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16  
N
P
U
T
S
The Preset button  
continues to blink.  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32  
4. Save the Preset: Press and release the Enter button to save the preset. The current  
configuration is now stored in the selected memory location.  
Press the button.  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
I
1 2 3 4 15 16  
17 18 19 20 31 32  
N
P
U
T
S
The Enter and Preset  
buttons return to unlit or  
background illumination.  
All input buttons return to unlit or background illumination.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example 7: Recalling a preset  
In the following example, a preset is recalled to become the current configuration. The steps  
show the front panel indications that result from your action.  
1. Clear all selections: Press and release the Esc button.  
2. Select Recall Preset mode: Press and release the Preset button.  
Preset Assigned  
Press and release the  
Preset button.  
The Preset button lights.  
I
1 2 3 15 16  
N
P
U
T
S
PRESET  
All input buttons with  
assigned presets light red.  
17 18 19 31 32  
No Preset Assigned  
3. Select the preset: Press and release the input button or output button for the desired  
preset.  
Press and release the Input 1 button.  
C O N T R O L  
The button blinks red to indicate that this  
preset number is selected but not recalled.  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
I
1 2 3 4 15 16  
17 18 19 20 31 32  
N
P
U
T
S
The Enter button blinks  
to indicate the need to  
recall the preset.  
4. Recall the preset: Press and release the Enter button. The configuration stored in the  
selected memory location is now the current configuration and can be viewed in the  
View-only mode (see example 4 on page 37).  
Press the button.  
C O N T R O L  
ENTER PRESET VIEW  
ESC  
I
1 2 3 4 15 16  
17 18 19 20 31 32  
N
P
U
T
S
The Enter and Preset  
buttons return to unlit or  
background illumination.  
All input buttons return to unlit or background illumination.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Muting and Unmuting Audio/RS-232 Outputs  
Individual audio or RS-232 outputs can be muted or unmuted as follows:  
NOTE: Output mutes are protected when front panel Lock mode 2 is selected. You  
can view the status of the output (muted or unmuted) in Lock mode 2 but you  
cannot change it from the front panel (see “Setting the Front Panel Locks  
(Executive Modes)” on page 59).  
1. Press the Esc button to clear any input button indications, output button indications, or  
control button indications that may be on.  
2. Press and release the View button.  
3. To select audio, press the Audio button if necessary, .  
4. One at a time, press and hold the button(s) for the desired output(s) for approximately  
2 seconds. The output button(s) for the selected output(s) blink to indicate the mute or  
return to their previous state to indicate the unmute.  
5. Press and release the View button to return to normal switcher operation.  
NOTES: You can mute only audio or RS-232 outputs, not video.  
When you enter View-only mode, the output LEDs turn on for all outputs  
without ties.  
If the audio/RS-232 wire pair of the selected input is defined as RS-232  
(see “Defining the Audio/RS-232 Wire Pair” on page 62), the serial  
output is muted.  
Mutes are saved to non-volatile memory. When power is removed and  
restored, the mute settings are retained.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example 8: Muting and unmuting an audio/RS-232 output  
In the following example, a switcher output is muted and unmuted. The steps show the  
front panel indications that result from your action.  
1. Clear all selections: Press and release the Esc button.  
2. Select View-only mode: Press and release the View button. The View button lights  
red.  
3. Select audio (or RS-232) for viewing and muting: If necessary, press and release the  
Audio button.  
NOTE: This example assumes that you have performed example 1, example 2,  
and example 3.  
I / O  
Press the button.  
Video cannot be  
muted. The lit  
status of the button  
is unimportant.  
The button lights red  
when selected.  
VIDEO AUDIO  
Until you select an input, the buttons for  
all outputs with no audio ties light red.  
O
U
T
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16  
P
U
T
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32  
S
NOTE: Output mutes are protected when front panel Lock mode 2 is selected. You  
can view the mutes in Lock mode 2 but you cannot change them from the  
page 59).  
If front panel Lock mode 2 is selected and you try to perform steps 4 and 5,  
the actions are ignored.  
4. Mute an output: Press and hold the Output 3 button for approximately 2 seconds until  
the button begins to blink..  
The button blinks to indicate that the  
Press and hold the Output 3 button.  
audio or RS-232 output is muted.  
3
3
2 seconds  
5. Unmute an output: Press and hold the Output 3 button for approximately 2 seconds  
until the button returns to its previous state.  
The button returns to its previous indication  
(either lit red, background illuminated, or  
unlit) to indicate that the output is unmuted.  
Press and hold.  
3
3
2 seconds  
6. Exit View-only mode: Press and release the View button.  
Press the button.  
All input buttons and output buttons  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
VIEW  
The View button returns to unlit or background illumination.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Viewing and Adjusting the Input Audio Level  
The audio level of each input can be displayed and adjusted through a range of -18  
dB to +24 dB to ensure that there is no noticeable volume difference among sources  
(see figure 25). The audio level can be adjusted from the front panel or under remote  
control. The default audio level is 0 dB.  
dBu  
+24  
+21  
+19  
+16  
+13  
+10  
+7  
VU  
21  
18  
15  
12  
9
6
3
0
-3  
dBu  
+24  
+21  
+19  
+16  
+13  
+10  
+7  
VU  
21  
18  
15  
12  
9
6
3
0
-3  
VCR  
Audio  
Inputs  
+4  
+1  
-2  
+4  
+1  
-2  
-6  
-6  
-5  
-9  
-5  
-9  
-8  
-12  
-15  
-18  
-21  
-8  
-12  
-15  
-18  
-21  
-12  
-15  
-18  
-12  
-15  
-18  
Low Audio  
Output Level  
Output  
Level  
INPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
8
CONTROL  
I/O  
ENTER  
PRESET  
VIEW  
ESC  
VIDEO  
AUDIO  
CONFIG  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
8
OUTPUTS  
MTPX PLUS SERIES  
MTP MATRIX SWITCHER  
dBu  
+24  
+21  
+19  
+16  
+13  
+10  
+7  
VU  
21  
18  
15  
12  
9
6
3
0
-3  
Audio System  
MTPX Plus 1616  
No noticeable  
volume differences  
between sources  
Audio  
Inputs  
+4  
+1  
-2  
-6  
-5  
-9  
-8  
-12  
-15  
-18  
-21  
-12  
-15  
-18  
High Audio  
Output Level  
CD Jukebox  
Figure 25. Audio Gain and Attenuation  
1. Press the Esc button to clear any input buttons, output buttons, or control buttons that  
may be lit.  
2. To enter Audio mode, press and hold the Audio button until the button begins to blink  
red, then release the button.  
3. Press and release an input button to select an input. The output buttons display the  
audio level for the selected input; the more output LEDs lit, the greater the gain or  
attenuation.  
Green output buttons indicate a gain (+) audio level.  
Red output buttons indicate an attenuation (–) level.  
Audio gain and attenuation is displayed differently on different models.  
Switchers with 32 output buttons — Each output button indicates 1 dB when lit  
steadily (see table 4 on page 49).  
Switchers with 16 output buttons — Each output button indicates 1 dB when  
blinking and 2 dB when lit steadily (see table 5 on page 50).  
MTPX Plus 128 (8 output buttons) — Each output button indicates 1 dB when  
blinking slowly, 2 dB when blinking quickly, and 3 dB when lit steadily (see table 5  
on page 50).  
4. Press and release the Esc (>) and View (<) buttons to increase and decrease the audio  
level.  
5. Press and release the Audio button to exit the Audio mode. The Audio button stops  
blinking.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTES: Pressing the Enter or Preset button also exits Audio mode. Pressing the  
Preset button changes to Recall Preset mode.  
There is one audio level setting per input. The audio level setting is shared  
by the left and right audio inputs.  
The audio level settings are stored in non-volatile memory. When power  
is removed and restored, the audio level settings are retained.  
Exiting Audio mode by pressing the Audio button always returns the I/O  
configuration to video and audio selected for configuration (Video and  
Audio buttons lit).  
Table 4. 32-output Button Audio Gain and Attenuation Display  
MTPX Plus 1632, 3216, 3232  
MTPX Plus 1632, 3216, 3232  
dB  
dB  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
24  
12  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
23  
22  
21  
11  
10  
9
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
8
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
7
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
6
5
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
4
3
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
14  
13  
2
1
0
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
= unlit button  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
Green indicates a positive (gain) level.  
= lit button  
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
Red indicates a negative (attenuation) level.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 5. 8- and 16-output Button Audio Gain and Attenuation Display  
MTPX Plus 128  
MTPX Plus 816, 168, 1616  
dB  
24  
dB  
24  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1F  
1S  
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2F  
2S  
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3F  
3S  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4F  
4S  
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5F  
5S  
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6F  
6S  
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7F  
7S  
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8F  
8S  
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
2
2
1
1
0
0
= Unlit button  
= Blinking button  
= Fast blinking button  
= Slow blinking button  
= Lit button  
S
F
Green indicates a positive (gain) level. Red indicates a negative (attenuation) level.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example 9: Viewing and adjusting an input audio level  
NOTE: This procedure can only be performed if the audio/RS-232 wire pair of the input  
is defined as audio (see ”Defining the Audio/RS-232 Wire Pair” on page 62).  
Because of the different gain and attenuation display schemes, the input audio levels that  
result from the following example are shown three times:  
As displayed on a 32-output button switcher  
As displayed on a on 16-output button switcher  
As displayed on a 8-output button switchers  
The 32-button drawings show the actions that led up to the display. The 16-button and  
8-button drawings show the gain or attenuation display only, not the actions that caused it.  
In the following example, an audio level is viewed and adjusted. The steps show the front  
panel indications that result from your action.  
1. Clear all selections: Press and release the Esc button.  
2. Select Audio mode: Press and hold the Audio button for approximately 2 seconds  
until it blinks.  
Press and hold.  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
2 seconds  
3. Select an input: Press and release the Input 5 button (see figure 26).  
Figure 26 through figure 28 show an audio gain level of +8 dB.  
Press the button. It lights green.  
I
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16  
N
P
U
T
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32  
S
The output buttons display the audio level and polarity (gain or attenuation)  
of the selected input.  
Each output button indicates 1 dB when lit.  
When the buttons are lit green, then indicate a gain (+) audio level.  
When the output buttons are lit red, they indicate an attenuation (-) level.  
O
U
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
5 16  
T
P
U
T
S
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 21 32  
Figure 26. Select an Input  
Figure 27 shows the same +8 dB level as figure 26, but displayed on a 16-output-button  
switcher, such as an MTPX Plus 816.  
2
1
3 4 5 6 7  
15  
8 9  
16  
OUTPUTS  
Figure 27. Level Display on a 16-Output-Button Switcher  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Figure 28 shows the same +8 dB level as figure 26, but displayed on an 8-output-button  
MTPX Plus 128.  
1
2
3F  
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 28. Level Display on an 8-Output-Button Switcher  
<
4. Change the audio level: Press and release the View ( ) button once (see figure 29) to  
decrease the input audio level by 1 dB.  
<
Press and release the View ( ) button several more times (see figure 29) to decrease the  
input audio level by 1 dB per button press. Note the output button indication changes  
<
that occur each time the View ( ) button is pressed.  
<
Figure 29 through figure 31 show the result of pressing the View ( ) button a total of  
nine times, an audio attenuation level of –1 dB. Note that the level is now displayed in  
red to indicate a negative level.  
Press the button.  
VIEW  
The output buttons display the audio level and  
polarity (gain or attenuation) of the selected input.  
O
U
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8 15 16  
Each output button indicates 1 dB when lit.  
When the buttons are lit green, they indicate a  
gain (+) audio level.  
T
P
U
T
S
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 31 32  
When the output buttons are lit red, they indicate  
an attenuation (-) level.  
Figure 29. Adjust the Input Audio Level  
Figure 30 shows the same –1 dB level as in figure 3-49, but displayed on a  
16-output-button switcher, such as a MTPX Plus 1616.  
2
1
3 4 5 6 7  
15  
8 9  
16  
OUTPUTS  
Figure 30. Level Display on a 16-Output-Button Switcher  
Figure 31 shows the same –1 dB level as in figure 3-49, but displayed on an  
8-output-button MTPX Plus 128.  
1S  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Figure 31. Level Display on an 8-Output-Button Switcher  
5. Exit Audio mode: Press and release the Audio button.  
Press the button.  
I / O  
The Video button  
The Audio button stops  
VIDEO AUDIO  
lights green.  
blinking and lights steadily.  
All input buttons and output buttons  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Viewing and Adjusting the Local Output Volume  
The audio level of each local output can be displayed and adjusted through a range of  
100% (no attenuation) to 0% (maximum [76 dB] attenuation). The audio level can be  
adjusted from the front panel or under serial port, USB port, or Ethernet control. The default  
volume is 100% (no attenuation).  
NOTE: Output volume is protected when front panel Lock mode 2 is selected. You can  
view the volume in Lock mode 2 but you cannot adjust it from the front panel  
1. Press the Esc button to clear any input buttons, output buttons, or control buttons that  
may be lit.  
2. To enter Audio mode, press and hold the Audio button until the button begins to blink  
red, then release the button.  
3. Press and release an output button to select an output. The input buttons display the  
volume level for the selected output. As a general rule, the more buttons that are lit, the  
higher the volume. The fewer buttons that are lit, the lower the volume.  
For a more detailed analysis of decoding the displayed value, see “Reading the  
displayed volume”, on the next page.  
>
<
4. Press and release the Esc ( ) and View ( ) buttons to increase and decrease the audio  
volume.  
5. Press and release the Audio button to save the audio settings and exit the Audio mode.  
The Audio button stops blinking.  
NOTES: Only the volume for the local audio outputs (outputs 1 through 4 [matrix  
sizes 816, 168, and 1616] or outputs 1 through 8 [matrix sizes 1632,  
3216, and 3232]) is adjustable. Outputs outside the local range cannot  
be selected in step 3.  
There is one audio volume level setting per local output. The audio level  
setting is shared by the left and right audio inputs.  
The audio volume levels are stored in non-volatile memory. When power  
is removed and restored, the audio level settings are retained.  
Exiting Audio mode by pressing the Audio button always returns the I/O  
buttons to Video lit green and Audio lit red.  
Pressing the Enter or Preset button also exits Audio mode. Pressing the  
Preset button changes to Recall Preset mode.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reading the displayed volume  
This section is a detailed look at reading the output volume display on the front panel. If you  
do not need to read the exact value of the volume setting, skip this section.  
There are 65 steps of volume attenuation, with 1 dB per step (button push), except for 0-to-1,  
which is 13 dB. At maximum attenuation, no input buttons are lit, 76 dB of attenuation is  
applied, and the audio output is effectively muted. At no attenuation, all input buttons are lit  
and the output volume is equal to the input signal plus any gain or attenuation that is applied  
to that specific input using the input audio level adjustment (see “Viewing and Adjusting  
the Input Audio Level”, on page 48). Other than the minimum and maximum volume,  
the switchers indicate the volume differently, depending on number (12, 16, or 32) of input  
buttons (see table 6 on the next page to read the volume display for each display scheme).  
For each display scheme, the input buttons blink or light sequentially to indicate the  
approximate volume of the selected output. Volume is defined as a percentage of the input  
audio signal that is applied to the output. From 0% of volume, the first Esc ( ) button push  
>
applies 5.5% of the input audio signal. From 5.5% on, each Esc ( ) push applies 1.5% more  
of the input audio signal to the output:  
>
Push Esc ( ) button again — 5.5% + 1.5% = 7% volume  
>
Switchers with 12 and 16 input buttons — The Input 1 button blinks slowly  
Switchers with 32 input buttons — The Input 1 button lights steadily  
Push Esc ( ) button twice more — 7% + 1.5% + 1.5% = 10% volume  
>
Switchers with 12 input buttons — The Input 1 button blinks quickly.  
Switchers with 16 input buttons — The Input 1 button lights steadily  
Switchers with 32 input buttons — The Input 1 and Input 2 button light steadily  
Push Esc ( ) button 19 times more — 10% + (19 times 1.5%) = 38.5% volume  
>
Switchers with 12 input buttons — The Input 1 through 4 buttons light steadily.  
Switchers with 16 input buttons — The Input 1 through 5 buttons light steadily  
and the Input 6 button blinks  
Switchers with 32 input buttons — The Input 1 through Input 11 buttons light  
steadily and the Input 12 button blinks  
When all input buttons are lit for any switcher model, the audio output is 100% of the  
audio input level.  
Another way to view the volume level is to think in terms of the attenuation that is applied  
to the output. Attenuation reduction is indicated by the lit or blinking input buttons: when  
fewer input buttons are lit, attenuation is greater (and the volume is quieter).  
At minimum volume, all input buttons are unlit or background illuminated and 76 dB of  
attenuation is applied to the output. The audio output is effectively muted.  
The first step of volume increase causes the Input 1 button to blink (slowly, in the  
case of switchers with 12 input buttons) . Attenuation is reduced by 13 dB (63 dB of  
attenuation is applied to the output).  
The second step of volume increase reduces the attenuation by an additional 1 dB  
(62 dB of attenuation is applied to the output). (On switchers with 32 input buttons the  
Input 1 button lights steadily.)  
Successive steps of volume increase cause consecutive input buttons to first blink  
and then light steadily. (On switchers with 32 input buttons, each consecutive button  
indicates a 1 dB attenuation reduction when blinking and a 2 dB attenuation  
reduction when lit.)  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 6. Audio Volume Display  
Highest # input button lit  
dB of  
Output  
Highest # input button lit  
dB of  
Output  
12-input 16-input 32-input attenuation volume 12-input 16-input 32-input attenuation volume  
switcher switcher switcher  
switcher switcher switcher  
None  
None  
None  
0%  
76  
63  
Fast  
blink  
1
1
6
17  
5.5%  
31  
53.5%  
Slow  
blink  
1
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
6
9
17  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
7%  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
55%  
56.5%  
58%  
2
2
18  
18  
8.5%  
10%  
Slow  
blink  
Fast  
blink  
7
7
9
1
3
3
19  
19  
11.5%  
13%  
59.5%  
61%  
Fast  
blink  
10  
10  
11  
11  
12  
12  
13  
13  
14  
14  
15  
15  
16  
Slow  
blink  
2
2
4
4
7
20  
20  
14.5%  
16%  
62.5%  
64%  
Slow  
blink  
8
8
Fast  
blink  
5
5
21  
21  
17.5%  
19%  
65.5%  
67%  
Fast  
blink  
2
6
6
22  
22  
20.5%  
22%  
68.5%  
70%  
8
Slow  
blink  
3
3
7
7
23  
23  
23.5%  
25%  
71.5%  
73%  
Slow  
blink  
9
9
Fast  
blink  
8
8
24  
24  
26.5%  
28%  
74.5%  
76%  
Fast  
blink  
3
9
9
9
25  
25  
29.5%  
31%  
77.5%  
79%  
Slow  
blink  
Slow  
blink  
10  
10  
4
4
10  
10  
26  
26  
32.5%  
34%  
80.5%  
82%  
Fast  
blink  
Fast  
blink  
11  
11  
27  
27  
35.5%  
37%  
83.5%  
85%  
10  
4
12  
12  
28  
28  
38.5%  
40%  
86.5%  
88%  
Slow  
blink  
11  
11  
8
Slow  
blink  
5
13  
13  
29  
29  
41.5%  
43%  
7
89.5%  
91%  
Fast  
blink  
6
Fast  
blink  
5
14  
14  
11  
30  
30  
44.5%  
46%  
5
92.5%  
94%  
4
Slow  
blink  
12  
12  
5
15  
15  
31  
31  
47.5%  
49%  
3
95.5%  
97%  
2
Fast  
blink  
Slow  
blink  
6
6
16  
16  
32  
32  
50.5%  
1
98.5%  
Fast  
blink  
8
12  
16  
32  
52%  
0
100%  
= blinking LED  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
For example: When lit steadily, the Input 3 button indicates the following, depending  
on the number of input buttons the switcher has:  
Switchers with 12 input buttons — 47 dB of attenuation when compared to the  
Input 3 button blinking quickly (48 dB to 50 dB of attenuation).  
The blinking Input 4 button (45 dB to 46 dB of attenuation) is at least 2 dB less  
than the fast blinking Input 3 button (48 dB minus 46 dB) and at most 5 dB less  
(50 dB minus 45 dB).  
Switchers with 16 input buttons — 52 dB of attenuation when compared to the  
Input 3 button blinking (53 dB to 55 dB of attenuation). The blinking Input 4 button  
(49 dB to 51 dB of attenuation) is at least 2 dB less than the blinking Input 3 button  
(53 dB minus 51 dB) and at most 6 dB less (55 dB minus 49 dB).  
Switchers with 32 input buttons — 58 dB of attenuation when compared to the  
Input 3 button blinking (59 dB of attenuation). The blinking Input 4 button (57 dB  
of attenuation) is 6 dB less than the steadily-lit Input 2 button (60 dB minus 57 dB).  
On switcher with 32 input buttons, the volume indications of the buttons are  
additive.  
For example: Input 1 lit (23 dB [22 dB + 1 dB] of attenuation reduction), Input  
2 lit (2 dB [1 dB + 1 dB] of attenuation reduction), and Input 3 blinking (1 dB of  
attenuation reduction) indicate that the output attenuation has been reduced by a  
total of 25 dB (22 dB + 2 dB + 1 dB = 25 dB).  
At full volume, no attenuation is applied to the output and all input buttons are lit  
steadily.  
Example 10: Viewing and adjusting a local output volume level  
In the following example, the audio output volume is viewed and adjusted. The steps show  
the front panel indications that result from your action.  
Because of the different volume display schemes, the output audio levels that result from the  
following example are shown three times:  
As displayed on a 32-input button switcher  
As displayed on a on 16-input button switcher  
As displayed on a 8-input button switchers  
The 32-button drawings show the actions that led up to the display. 16-button and 8-button  
drawings show the volume display only, not the actions that caused it.  
1. Clear all selections: Press and release the Esc button.  
2. Select Audio mode: Press and hold the Audio button for approximately 2 seconds  
until it blinks.  
Press and hold.  
AUDIO  
AUDIO  
2 seconds  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Select an output: Press and release the output 1 button.  
In figure 32 through figure 34, the lit or blinking input buttons indicate 41.5 percent of  
the applied audio input. The unlit input buttons indicate an audio volume attenuation of  
39 dB. Figure 33 and figure 34 show the same 41.5 percent, 39 dB volume.  
39 dB attenuation  
41.5% volume  
O
U
T
P
U
T
I
Press the button.  
It lights green  
1
2
6
1
2
3
12 13 14 15 16  
N
P
U
T
S
17 18 12  
17 18 19 27 28 29 30 31 32  
S
Each lit input button beyond input 1 indicates that 3 percent of the total input volume  
is applied to the output. The flashing button indicates an additional 1.5 percent.  
Figure 32. Select Output 1  
Figure 33 shows the same volume as figure 32, but displayed on a 16-input-button  
switcher, such as an MTPX Plus 1616.  
39 dB attenuation,  
41.5% volume  
INPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
Figure 33. Volume Display on a 16-Input-Button Switcher  
Figure 34 shows the same volume as figure 32, but displayed on a 12-input-button  
MTPX Plus 128.  
39 dB attenuation,  
41.5% volume  
I
N
P
U
1
2
3
4
5S  
6
7
11  
12  
10  
8
9
T
Figure 34. Volume Display on a 12-Input-Button Switcher  
NOTE: Volume is protected when front panel Lock mode 2 is selected. You can  
view the volume in Lock mode 2 but you cannot change it from the front  
page 59).  
If front panel Lock mode 2 is selected and you try to perform step 4, the  
actions are ignored and the Enter, Video, and Audio buttons flash.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Change the volume: Press and release the Esc ( ) button once (see figure 35) to  
>
increase the volume by 1.5%.  
Press and release the Esc ( ) button several more times (figure 3-57) to increase the  
>
volume by 1.5% per button press. Note the input button indication changes that occur  
each time the Esc ( ) button is pressed and released.  
>
NOTE: You can press and hold the Esc ( ) or View ( ) button to ramp the level up  
>
>
or down by 3 dB per second to the high or low limit.  
Figure 35 show the result of pressing the Esc ( ) button a total of 13 times. In figure 35  
>
through figure 37, the lit or blinking input buttons indicate 61 percent of the applied  
audio input. The unlit input buttons indicate an audio volume attenuation of 26 dB.  
Press the button  
ESC  
I
1
2
3
12 13 14 15 16  
N
P
U
T
Decrease the audio  
17 18 19 27 28 29 30 31 32  
S
attenuation (thereby  
increasing the audio level)  
that is applied to the  
output volume level by  
1 dB per button push.  
26 dB attenuation,  
61% volume  
Each lit input button beyond input 1 indicates that 3 percent of the total input is applied to the output.  
Figure 35. Adjust the Output Audio Volume  
Figure 36 shows the same volume (61%) as in figure 35, but displayed on a  
16-input-button switcher, such as an MTPX Plus 168.  
26 dB attenuation  
61% volume  
INPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
Figure 36. Volume Display on a 16-Input-Button Switcher  
Figure 37 shows the same volume (61%) as in figure 35, but displayed on a  
12-input-button MTPX Plus 128.  
–26 dB attenuation,  
61% volume  
I
N
P
U
1
2
3
4
5
6
7F  
11  
12  
10  
8
9
T
Figure 37. Volume Display on a 12-Input-Button Switcher  
5. Exit Audio mode: Press and release the Audio button to (figure 3-60).  
Press the button.  
I / O  
The Video button  
The Audio button stops  
VIDEO AUDIO  
lights green.  
blinking and lights steadily.  
All input buttons and output buttons  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting the Front Panel Locks (Executive Modes)  
The matrix switcher has three levels of front panel security lock that limit the operation of  
the switcher from the front panel. The three levels are:  
Lock mode 0 — The front panel is completely unlocked. All front panel functions are  
available.  
Lock mode 1 — All changes are locked from the front panel (except for setting Lock  
mode 2). Some functions can be viewed.  
Lock mode 2 — Basic functions are unlocked. Advanced features are locked and can be  
viewed only.  
Basic functions consist of:  
Making ties  
Saving and recalling presets  
Setting input audio gain and attenuation  
Changing Lock modes  
Advanced functions consist of:  
Creating I/O groups  
Setting audio output mutes  
Setting audio output volume  
Setting the rear panel remote port protocol and baud rate  
Setting the audio/RS-232 input format (audio or RS-232)  
NOTE: The switcher is shipped from the factory in Lock mode 2.  
Selecting Lock mode 2 or toggling between mode 2 and mode 0  
NOTE: If the switcher is in Lock mode 0 or mode 1, this procedure selects mode 2.  
If the switcher is in Lock mode 2, this procedure selects mode 0 (unlocks the  
switcher).  
Toggle the lock on and off by pressing and holding the Enter button, the Video button, and  
the Audio button simultaneously for approximately 2 seconds (see figure 38).  
Press and hold the Enter, Video, and Audio  
buttons simultaneously to turn on Lock mode 2  
or to toggle between mode 2 and mode 0.  
The Enter, Video,  
I / O  
I / O  
and Audio buttons  
blink twice to indicate  
the mode change.  
Release the buttons.  
2 seconds  
ENTER  
VIDEO AUDIO  
ENTER  
VIDEO AUDIO  
Figure 38. Toggle Front Panel Lock Between Mode 2 and Mode 0  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting Lock mode 2 or toggling between mode 2 and mode 1  
NOTE: If the switcher is in Lock mode 0 or mode 1, this procedure selects mode 2.  
If the switcher is in Lock mode 2, this procedure selects mode 1.  
Toggle the lock on and off by pressing and holding the Video button and the Audio button  
simultaneously for approximately 2 seconds (see figure 39).  
Press and hold the Video and Audio buttons  
simultaneously to turn on Lock mode 2 or to  
toggle between mode 1 and mode 2.  
The Video and Audio  
I / O  
I / O  
buttons blink twice to  
indicate the mode  
change.  
2 seconds  
VIDEO AUDIO  
VIDEO AUDIO  
Release the buttons.  
Figure 39. Toggle Front Panel Lock Between Mode 2 and Mode 1  
Performing a System Reset from the Front Panel  
E
}
The front panel reset is identical to issuing the  
ZXXX SIS command (see the  
Programming Guide” section). A system reset performs the following functions:  
NOTE: System reset does not reset the Internet protocol (IP) settings or replace user-  
installed firmware.  
Clears all ties and presets  
Clears all audio or RS-232 mutes  
Resets all I/O grouping  
Resets all input level/peaking to zero  
Resets all input and output skew adjustments to zero.  
Resets all output pre-peaking to off  
Disables all RS-232 output inserts  
Sets all audio/RS-232 wire pair inputs to audio  
Resets all input audio levels to unity gain (0 dB)  
Sets all output volume levels to 100% (0 dB of attenuation)  
NOTE: The system reset clears most image and audio adjustments. If you want to save  
these settings, use the Matrix Switchers Control Program and the File> Save  
MATRIX settings as... selection before you perform this reset (see the  
Matrix Software” section.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reset the switcher to the factory default settings by pressing and holding the Video button  
and Audio button simultaneously while you apply AC power to the switcher (see figure 40).  
Press and hold the Video and Audio  
buttons simultaneously while you  
apply power to the switcher.  
I / O  
The switcher flashes  
the button indicators  
VIDEO AUDIO  
and then turns them off.  
Power  
Continue to hold the Video and Audio  
buttons until all input and output buttons  
return to unlit and the Video and Audio  
buttons turn on.  
Release the Video and Audio buttons.  
Figure 40. System Reset  
NOTE: If background illumination was turned on before the reset, the I/O and control  
buttons are unlit after the reset. But, when you cycle power, background  
illumination returns to as selected.  
Background Illumination  
The buttons on the front panel can be set to provide amber background illumination at  
all times or the background illumination can be turned off. To toggle the background  
illumination on or off, press and hold the Input 1 and Input 2 buttons simultaneously for  
approximately 2 seconds (see figure 41).  
Press and hold the buttons.  
I
1
2
16  
N
P
U
T
17 18 19 32  
S
After the illumination status of the  
buttons change (after approximately  
2 seconds), release the buttons.  
Figure 41. Toggle Background Illumination on or off  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Defining the Audio/RS-232 Wire Pair  
NOTE: The TP audio/RS-232 input wire pair configurations are protected when front  
panel Lock mode 2 is selected. You can view the configurations in Lock mode 2  
but you cannot adjust them from the front panel (see “Setting the Front  
The switcher is compatible with MTPs that transmit and receive mono audio and those that  
transmit and receive RS-232 serial data. You must configure the switcher for the appropriate  
audio/RS-232 input for each TP input. The audio/RS-232 settings for each TP input can be  
viewed and changed from the front panel.  
View and configure the TP input audio/RS-232 configuration settings for the switcher as  
follows:  
1. Select Serial Port and Audio/RS-232 Input Configuration mode: Simultaneously  
press and hold all Control buttons (Enter, Preset, View, and Esc).  
Press and hold the buttons.  
C O N T R O L  
I / O  
C O N T R O L  
2 seconds  
VIEW  
ESC  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
ENTER PRESET  
VIDEO AUDIO  
All Control buttons light with  
one flashing.  
Both I/O buttons light  
with one flashing.  
NOTE: The Control and I/O buttons indicate the baud rate and protocol. See “Selecting  
the Rear Panel Remote Port Protocol and Baud Rate”, later in this section.  
Unlit input buttons indicate that the audio/RS-232 twisted wire pair of the input is configured as audio.  
Red input buttons indicate that the audio/RS-232 twisted wire pair of the input is configured as RS-232.  
Unlit Unlit Unlit Unlit Unlit Unlit Unlit Red Unlit Unlit  
INPUTS  
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 16  
2. Release the Control buttons.  
NOTE: If front panel Lock mode 2 is selected and you try to perform step 3, the  
actions are ignored and the Enter, Video, and Audio buttons flash (see  
3. Change the audio/RS-232 wire pair configuration for an input: Press and release  
the input button to toggle the configuration for that input.  
Press the button to toggle the audio/RS-232 wire  
pair configuration (to audio, in this example).  
INPUTS  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 16  
4. Exit the Serial Port and Audio/RS-232 Input Configuration mode: Press and release  
an output button.  
All Control, I/O, Input, and Output buttons  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
Press an  
output button.  
I / O  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
VIDEO AUDIO  
5
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting the Rear Panel Remote Port Protocol and Baud Rate  
All switchers can operate at the 9600, 19200, 38400, and 115200 baud rate. Switchers  
other than the MTPX Plus 128 can support either RS-232 or RS-422 serial communication  
protocol. The settings of these variables can be viewed and changed from the front panel.  
View and configure the serial communications settings as follows:  
1. Select Serial Port and Audio/RS-232 Input Configuration mode: Simultaneously  
press and hold all Control buttons (Enter, Preset, View, and Esc).  
Press and hold the buttons.  
C O N T R O L  
I / O  
C O N T R O L  
2 seconds  
VIEW  
ESC  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
ENTER PRESET  
VIDEO AUDIO  
All Control buttons light with  
one flashing.  
Both I/O buttons light  
with one flashing.  
NOTES: The Input buttons indicate  
the configuration of the  
secondary wire pairs. See  
Selecting the TP wire  
pair secondary input”,  
earlier in this section.  
The flashing Control button indicates the baud rate as follows:  
Enter — 9600  
View — 38400  
Preset — 19200  
Esc — 115200  
The MTPX Plus 128 is RS-232  
only. For this switcher, the  
Video and Audio button  
indications have no  
The flashing I/O button indicates the protocol as follows:  
Video — RS-232 Audio — RS-422/RS-485  
In this example, the port is set to RS-232 at 9600 baud.  
meaning.  
2. Release the Control buttons.  
NOTE: If front panel Lock mode 2 is selected and you try to perform step 3, the  
actions are ignored and the Enter, Video, and Audio buttons flash (see  
3. Change a value: Press and release the button that relates to the desired value.  
Press and release the button(s) to configure the port as  
follows:  
Baud rate:  
Enter — 9600  
View — 38400  
Preset — 19200  
Esc — 115200  
Serial protocol:  
Video — RS-232  
Audio — RS-422/RS-485  
The selected buttons blink and the others remain lit.  
In this example, the port is set to RS-422 at 38400 baud.  
NOTE: The MTPX Plus 128 is RS-232 only.  
For this switcher, the Video and Audio  
button indications have no meaning.  
I / O  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
VIDEO AUDIO  
4. Exit the Serial Port and Audio/RS-232 Input Configuration mode: Press and release  
an output button.  
All Control, I/O, Input, and Output buttons  
return to unlit or background illumination.  
Press an  
output button.  
I / O  
C O N T R O L  
VIEW  
ESC  
ENTER PRESET  
VIDEO AUDIO  
5
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rear Panel Operations  
The rear panel has a Reset button that initiates four levels of resets (numbered 1, 3, 4, and 5  
for the sake of comparison with an Extron IPL product). The Reset button is recessed, so use  
a small screwdriver, a pointed stylus, or a ballpoint pen.  
See table 7 on the next page for a summary of the modes.  
CAUTION: Review the reset modes carefully. Using the wrong reset mode may result  
in unintended loss of flash memory programming, port reassignment, or a  
controller reboot.  
NOTE: The reset modes listed on the next page close all open IP and Telnet connections  
and close all sockets. Also, the following modes are separate functions, not a  
continuation from Mode 1 to Mode 5.  
Performing a Hard Reset (Reset 1)  
The hard reset function restores the switcher to the base firmware that it was shipped with.  
After a hard reset, events do not automatically start, but user settings and files are restored.  
Perform a hard reset as follows:  
NOTE: The hard reset restores the factory-installed firmware. The switcher reverts  
to that factory firmware the next time power is cycled off and on unless a  
firmware update is performed before the power cycle.  
1. If necessary, turn off power to the switcher.  
2. Press and hold the Reset button on the rear panel while you apply AC power to the  
switcher (see figure 42).  
Press and hold the button  
while you apply power.  
The switcher flashes the front panel  
button indicators green, red, and  
amber and then turns them off.  
Power  
Continue to hold the Reset button until  
all input and output buttons return to  
either unlit or to background illumination  
and the Video and Audio buttons turn on.  
Release the Reset button.  
Figure 42. Hard Reset  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 7.  
Reset Mode Comparison/Summary  
Mode  
1
Activation  
Result  
Purpose/Notes  
Hold down the recessed Reset button  
while applying power to the switcher.  
The switcher reverts to the factory default  
firmware. Event scripting will not start if the  
switcher is powered on in this mode. All user files  
and settings (such as drivers, adjustments, and IP  
settings) are maintained.  
Use mode 1 to revert  
to the factory default  
firmware version if  
incompatibility issues  
arise with user-loaded  
firmware.  
NOTE: After a mode 1 reset is  
performed, update the  
switcher firmware to the  
latest version. Do not  
operate the switcher  
firmware version that  
results from the mode 1  
reset. If you want to  
use the factory default  
firmware, you must  
NOTE: If you do not want to update  
firmware, or you performed a mode 1  
reset by mistake, cycle power to the  
switcher to return to the firmware  
version that was running before  
the mode 1 reset. Use the 0Q SIS  
command to confirm that the factory  
default firmware is no longer running  
(look for the asterisk [*] following the  
version number.  
upload that version  
again (see the “Matrix  
Software”section for  
details on uploading  
firmware).  
3
4
Hold down the Reset button for about 3 Mode 3 turns events on or off. During resetting,  
Mode 3 is useful for  
seconds, until the Reset LED blinks once, the Reset LED flashes 2 times if events are starting, 3 troubleshooting.  
then press and release Reset (<1 second) times if events are stopping.  
within 1 second.  
Hold down the Reset button for about  
6 seconds, until the Reset LED blinks  
twice (once at 3 seconds and again at 6  
seconds). Then press and release Reset  
(<1 second) within 1 second.  
Mode 4:  
Enables ARP capability.  
Mode 4 enables you  
to set IP address  
information using ARP  
and the MAC address.  
Sets the IP address to the factory default.  
Sets the subnet address to the factory default.  
Sets the gateway address to the factory default.  
Sets port mapping to the factory default.  
Turns DHCP off.  
Turn events off.  
The Reset LED flashes four times in quick succession  
during the reset.  
5
Hold down the Reset button for about  
9 seconds, until the Reset LED blinks  
three times (once at 3 seconds, again  
at 6 seconds, and then again at 9  
seconds). Then press and release Reset  
(<1 second) within 1 second.  
Mode 5 performs a complete reset to factory  
defaults (with the exception of the firmware):  
Does everything mode 4 does.  
Mode 5 is useful if  
you want to start over  
with configuration and  
Resets most all real time adjustments, including: uploading or to replace  
clears all ties and presets,  
clears all audio or RS-232 mutes,  
clears all I/O grouping,  
events.  
NOTE: Mode 5 reset clears  
most adjustments. To  
save these settings,  
clears all input level/peaking,  
clears all skew adjustments,  
clears all output pre-peaking,  
disables all RS-232 output inserts,  
sets all audio/RS-232 wire pairs to audio,  
clears all audio settings.  
use the Windows-  
based Matrix Switchers  
Control Program and the  
File  
>
Save MATRIX  
Resets all IP options.  
settings as...  
selection before you  
perform this reset (See  
the “Matrix Software”  
section.  
Removes/clears all files for the switcher.  
The reset LED flashes four times in quick succession  
during the reset.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Performing Soft System Resets (Resets 3, 4, and 5)  
Perform a soft reset of the switcher as follows:  
1. Use a small screwdriver to press and hold the rear panel Reset button until the front  
panel Video and Audio buttons blink the number of times for the desired reset: once  
(events reset), twice (system reset), or three times (absolute reset) (see figure 43).  
Release, then immediately  
press and release again.  
Press and hold  
the Reset button.  
Reset LED flashes once.  
3 seconds  
Events Reset  
(Mode 1)  
Front panel I/O buttons flash once.  
I / O  
VIDEO AUDIO  
Release, then immediately  
press and release again.  
Press and hold  
the Reset button.  
Reset LED flashes twice.  
6 seconds  
IP Settings  
Reset  
(Mode 4)  
Front panel I/O buttons flash twice.  
I / O  
VIDEO AUDIO  
Reset LED flashes  
three times.  
Press and hold  
the Reset button.  
Release, then immediately  
press and release again.  
9 seconds  
Absolute Reset  
(Mode 5)  
Front panel I/O buttons flash three times.  
I / O  
VIDEO AUDIO  
Figure 43. Soft System Resets  
2. Release the Reset button and then immediately press and release the Reset button  
again. Nothing happens if the second momentary press does not occur within 1 second.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Optimizing the Audio  
Each audio level for each input can be adjusted within a range of -18 dB to +24 dB, so  
there are no noticeable volume differences between sources and for the best headroom  
and signal-to-noise ratio. The volume for each local audio output can be adjusted from full  
loudness to effectively muted. Adjust the levels as follows:  
1. Connect audio sources to all desired inputs and connect the local audio outputs to  
output devices such as audio players. See “Signal inputs”, in the “Installation” section.  
For best results, wire all of the inputs and the outputs balanced.  
2. Power on the audio sources, the switcher, and the audio players.  
3. Switch among the inputs (see “Creating a configuration”, on page 31), listening to  
the audio with a critical ear or measuring the output audio level with test equipment,  
such as a VU meter.  
4. As necessary, adjust the input audio level of each input (see “Viewing and Adjusting  
the Input Audio Level”, on page 48) so that the approximate output level is the same  
for all selected inputs.  
5. Tie an audio input to each local audio output.  
6. As necessary, adjust the output audio level of each output (see “Viewing and  
Video Adjustments  
Image adjustments are available via SIS commands, the Matrix Switchers Control Program,  
and the built-in HTML pages. See “Optimizing the Video” in the “Matrix Software”  
section.  
Troubleshooting  
This section recommends what to do if you have problems operating the switcher.  
1. Ensure that all devices are plugged in and powered on.  
2. Check to see if one or more outputs are muted.  
3. Ensure an active input is selected for output on the switcher.  
4. Ensure that the proper signal format is supplied.  
5. Check the cabling and make corrections as necessary.  
6. Call the Extron S3 Sales and Technical Support Hotline if necessary. See the end of this  
guide for the phone number in your region of the world.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuration Worksheets  
Rather than trying to remember the configuration for each preset, use worksheets to  
record this information. Make copies of the blank worksheet on page 71 (32-input button  
and -output button switchers) and page 72 (16-button and 12-button switchers) and use  
one for each preset configuration. Cross out all unused or inactive inputs and outputs. Use  
different colors for video and audio.  
NOTE: All of the equipment in the following examples is connected through the  
appropriate MTP transmitter or receiver.  
Worksheet Example 1: System equipment  
Figure 44 shows a portion of a worksheet for an MTPX Plus 1616 in a fictional organization  
with the system hardware annotated. Inputs 10, 11, and 13 have no connection in this  
organization, so they are crossed out on the worksheet. Similarly, outputs 7 and 9 through  
16 are crossed out.  
Input sources  
Camera/ Camera  
PC 1  
PC 2  
Audio Classroom Classroom Laptop Rack DVD  
VTG 300  
mic - Main  
podium  
#2  
RGB 202 RGB 202  
CD  
#1 VCR  
#2 VCR RGB 202 (USP 405)  
USP 405 USP 405  
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
10  
10  
11  
11  
12  
13  
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
Main hall Main hall Podium  
Sound  
system  
#1  
Sound  
VCR  
DA 6  
FP #1  
FP #2  
monitor  
system (VSC 500)  
#2  
Output destinations  
3
Weekly status mtg  
Video:  
Preset #  
Title:  
Audio:  
Fill in the preset number and use colors, dashes, etc., to make connecting lines.  
Indicate if the configuration is for video, audio, or both.  
Figure 44. Worksheet Example 1: System Equipment  
Inputs include PCs, an audio CD player, cameras, and an Extron VTG 300. Output devices  
include monitors, projectors, a stereo, and a VCR for recording presentations.  
The VTG 300 video test generator connected to input 12 enables a video test pattern to be  
sent to one, several, or all output devices for problem isolation or adjustment purposes. An  
audio test tape or CD could be used in a similar manner to check out the audio components.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Worksheet Example 2: Daily Configuration  
Figure 45 continues from worksheet example 1 by showing the video and audio ties that  
make up the configuration of preset 1. Black lines shows video ties and red lines show the  
audio ties.  
Input sources  
Camera/ Camera  
PC 1  
PC 2  
Audio Classroom Classroom Laptop Rack DVD  
VTG 300  
mic - Main  
podium  
#2  
RGB 202 RGB 202  
CD  
#1 VCR  
#2 VCR RGB 202 (USP 405)  
USP 405 USP 405  
1
2
3
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
9
10  
10  
11  
11  
12  
13  
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
Main hall Main hall Podium  
Sound  
system  
#1  
Sound  
VCR  
DA 6  
FP #1  
FP #2  
monitor  
system (VSC 500)  
#2  
Output destinations  
3
Weekly status mtg  
Video:  
Preset #  
Title:  
Audio:  
Fill in the preset number and use colors, dashes, etc., to make connecting lines.  
Indicate if the configuration is for video, audio, or both.  
Figure 45. Worksheet Example 2: Daily Configuration  
In this example:  
The image of the presenter, from the main podium camera (input 1), is:  
Displayed in the main hall (output 1)  
Displayed in the lobby via a distribution amplifier (output 8)  
Tied to the VCR (output 6)  
The presenter has a presentation on her laptop computer (input 4) that is:  
Displayed in the main hall (output 2)  
Displayed locally on the podium (output 3)  
The audio from the microphone the presenter uses (input 3) is:  
Played in the hall (output 1)  
Played in the conference room (output 4)  
Sent to the VCR (output 6)  
Classical music from the CD player (input 5) is:  
Played in the background in the main hall on sound system #2 (output 5)  
Played in the lobby via a distribution amplifier (output 8)  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Worksheet Example 3: Test configuration  
The A/V system in our fictional organization needs to be fine tuned on a regular basis.  
Figure 46 shows a typical test configuration, with an Extron video test generator (input 12)  
generating a test pattern to all monitors (outputs 1, 2, 3, and 8). Sound checks are run from  
the CD player (input 5) to all audio systems (outputs 1, 2, 4, 5, and 8).  
Input sources  
Camera/ Camera  
PC 1  
PC 2  
Audio Classroom Classroom Laptop Rack DVD  
VTG 300  
mic - Main  
podium  
#2  
RGB 202 RGB 202  
CD  
#1 VCR  
#2 VCR RGB 202 (USP 405)  
USP 405 USP 405  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
7
8
9
9
10  
10  
11  
11  
12  
13  
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
Main hall Main hall Podium  
Sound  
system  
#1  
Sound  
VCR  
DA 6  
FP #1  
FP #2  
monitor  
system (VSC 500)  
#2  
Output destinations  
3
Weekly status mtg  
Video:  
Preset #  
Title:  
Audio:  
Fill in the preset number and use colors, dashes, etc., to make connecting lines.  
Indicate if the configuration is for video, audio, or both.  
Figure 46. Worksheet Example 3: Test Configuration  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MTPX Plus Series • Operation  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Programming  
Guide  
This section describes the operation of the MTPX Plus Matrix Switchers via SIS commands,  
including:  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Local Host-Control Ports  
The switcher has two local ports that can be directly connected to a host device such as  
a computer running the Extron DataViewer utility or the HyperTerminal utility, an RS-232  
capable PDA, or a control system. These ports make remote control of the switcher possible  
using a direct connection. The local ports are:  
NOTES: The rear panel and front panel ports are independent of one another. A  
front panel Configuration port connection and a rear panel Remote port  
connection can be active at the same time.  
The serial port protocol of both Remote ports and the 2.5 mm stereo jack  
Configuration port is:  
9600 baud  
No parity  
1 stop bit  
8-bit  
No flow control  
in the “Operation” section to configure the rear panel Remote port from the  
front panel.  
Extron recommends leaving the serial ports at 9600 baud only.  
The rear panel Remote (serial) port (see “Remote Connection“ in the “Installation”  
section)  
MTPX Plus 128 — An RS-232 only port, a 3-pole captive screw connector  
All other MTPX Plus models — An RS-232 / RS-422 port, a 9-pin D female  
connector  
The front panel Configuration port (see “Front Panel Configuration Port“ in the  
“Installation” section)  
MTPX Plus 128 — A mini USB B port. A standard USB cable and the Extron  
DataViewer utility, version 2.0 or newer, can be used for connection to the  
Configuration port.  
NOTE: Before you use the MTPX Plus 128 Configuration (USB) port for  
the first time, you need to install and activate the USB driver on  
your computer. The simplest way to do this is to install version 8.0  
or newer of the Matrix Switchers Control Program and then run  
the Found New Hardware Wizard (see “Installing the Software“  
and “Activating a USB port for the first time“ in the “Matrix  
Software“ section).  
All other MTPX Plus models — A 2.5 mm mini stereo jack (RS-232 only) port  
NOTE: The optional 9-pin D to 2.5 mm mini jack TRS RS-232 cable, part  
#70-335-01 can be used for connection to the Configuration port.  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ethernet (LAN) Port  
The Ethernet cable can be terminated as a straight-through cable or a crossover cable and  
must be properly terminated for your application (see “Ethernet Connection“ in the  
“Installation” section).  
Crossover cable — Direct connection between the computer and the MTPX Plus  
switcher.  
Patch (straight-through) cable — Connection of the MTPX Plus switcher to an  
Ethernet LAN.  
Default IP addresses  
To access the MTPX Plus switcher via the LAN port, you need the IP address for the unit, and  
may need the subnet mask and the gateway address. If the IP address has been changed  
to an address comprised of words and characters, you can determine the actual numeric IP  
address using the ping (ICMP) utility (see “Ethernet Link” on page 146 for more details). If  
the addresses have not been changed, the factory-specified defaults are:  
IP address  
192.168.254.254  
Subnet mask  
255.255.0.0  
Gateway address 0.0.0.0  
Establishing a Connection  
Establish a network connection to an MTPX Plus switcher as follows:  
1. Open a TCP socket to port 23 using the IP address of the switcher.  
NOTE: If the local system administrators have not changed the value, the factory-  
specified default, 192.168.254.254, is the correct value for this field.  
The switcher responds with a copyright message including the date, the name of the  
product, firmware version, part number, and the current date/time.  
NOTES: If the switcher is not password-protected, the device is ready to accept  
SIS commands immediately after it sends the copyright message.  
If the switcher is password-protected, a passwordprompt appears below  
the copyright message.  
2. If the switcher is password protected, enter the appropriate administrator or user  
password.  
If the password is accepted, the switcher responds with Login Useror Login  
Administrator.  
If the password is not accepted, the Passwordprompt reappears.  
Connection Timeouts  
The Ethernet link times out after a designated period of time of no communications. By  
default, this timeout value is set to five minutes but the value can be changed. See the  
Configure port timeout SIS commands on page 95.  
NOTE: Extron recommends leaving the default timeout at 5 minutes and periodically  
issuing the Query (Q) command to keep the connection active. If there are long  
idle periods, Extron recommends disconnecting the socket and reopening the  
connection when another command must be sent.  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Number of Connections  
An MTPX Plus switcher can have up to 200 simultaneous TCP connections, including all http  
sockets and telnet connections. When the connection limit is reached, the switcher accepts  
no new connections until some have been closed. No error message or indication is given  
that the connection limit has been reached. To maximize performance of an IP Link device,  
the number of connections should stay low and unnecessary open sockets should be closed.  
Using Verbose Mode  
Telnet connections to an MTPX Plus switcher can be used to monitor for changes that  
occur on the switcher, such as front panel operations and SIS commands from other telnet  
sockets or a serial port. For a telnet session to receive change notices from the switcher, the  
telnet session must be in verbose mode 1 or 3. See the Verbose Mode SIS command on  
page 95. In verbose mode 3, the telnet socket reports changes in messages that resemble  
SIS command responses.  
Host-to-Switcher Instructions  
The switcher accepts SIS (Simple Instruction Set) commands through the RS-232 port. SIS  
commands consist of one or more characters per command field. They do not require any  
special characters to begin or end the command character sequence. Each switcher response  
to an SIS command ends with a carriage return and a line feed (CR/LF =  
the end of the response character string. A string is one or more characters.  
), which signals  
]
Switcher-initiated Messages  
When a local event such as a front panel operation or an IR 501 command string occurs, the  
switcher responds by sending a message to the host. The switcher-initiated messages are  
listed below (underlined).  
The switcher does not expect a response from the host, but, for example, the host program  
might request a new status.  
(C) COPYRIGHT 20yy, Extron Electronics MTPX, Vx.xx,  
60-nnn-01 {day,date, time}  
]
The switcher initiates the copyright message when it is first powered on or when a  
connection via Internet protocol (IP) is established. Vx.xx is the firmware version number and  
60-nnnn-01 is the switcher part number.  
NOTE: {Day, date, time} are only reported if the connection is via the LAN port.  
Password:  
]
The switcher initiates the password message immediately after the copyright message when  
the controlling system is connected using TCP/IP or Telnet and the switcher is password  
protected. This message means that the switcher requires an administrator or user level  
password before it will perform the commands entered via this link. The switcher repeats  
the password message response for every entry other than a valid password until a valid  
password is entered.  
Login Administrator  
]
]
]
Login User  
]
The switcher initiates the login message when a correct administrator or user password has  
been entered. If the user and administrator passwords are the same, the switcher defaults to  
administrator privileges.  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Qik  
]
The switcher initiates the Qik message when a front panel tie creation has occurred.  
Sprnn  
]
The switcher initiates the Spr message when a memory preset has been saved from the front  
panel. “nn” is the preset number.  
Rprnn  
]
The switcher initiates the Rpr message when a memory preset has been recalled from the  
front panel. “nn” is the preset number.  
InnnAudxx  
]
The switcher initiates the Aud message when a front panel input audio level change has  
occurred. “n” is the input number and “xx” is the dB level.  
OutnnVolxx  
]
The switcher initiates the Vol message when a front panel output audio volume change has  
occurred. nn is the output number and xx is the volume level.  
Amtnn*x  
]
The switcher initiates the Amt message when an audio or RS-232 output mute is toggled  
on or off from the front panel. nn is the output number and x is the mute status: 1 = on,  
0 = off.  
Exen  
]
The switcher initiates the Exe message when the front panel security lockout (executive  
mode) is toggled on or off from the front panel. “n” is the executive mode: 0, 1, or 2.  
Switcher Error Responses  
When the switcher receives an SIS command and determines that it is valid, it performs the  
command and sends a response to the host device. If the switcher is unable to perform  
the command because the command is invalid or contains invalid parameters, the switcher  
returns an error response to the host. The error response codes are:  
E01— Invalid input channel number (out of range)  
E10— Invalid command  
E11— Invalid preset number (out of range)  
E12— Invalid output number (out of range)  
E13— Invalid value (out of range)  
E14— Invalid command for this configuration  
E17— Timeout (caused only by direct write of global presets)  
E21— Invalid room number  
E22— Busy  
E24— Privileges violation (Users have access to all view and read commands (other than the  
administrator password), and can create ties, presets, and audio or RS-232 mutes  
E25— Device not present  
E26— Maximum number of connections exceeded  
E27— Invalid event number  
E28— Bad filename / file not found  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Command and Response Tables  
The command and response  
table begins on page 80.  
Symbols used in the  
ASCII to Hex Conversion Table  
Space  
table represent variables in the  
command and response fields.  
Command and response examples  
are shown throughout the table.  
With the exception of the audio  
input gain and attenuation  
commands, the SIS commands are  
not case sensitive. The ASCII to  
HEX conversion table at right is for  
use with the command and response table.  
Symbol definitions  
]
= Carriage return/line feed  
} = Carriage return (no line feed)  
|
= Pipe (can be used interchangeably with the }character)  
= space  
E = Escape key  
W
= Can be used interchangeable with the Echaracter  
X! = Input number (for tie)  
X@ = Output number  
X# = TP input number  
X$ = Audio/RS-232 wire pair input type  
X% = RS-232 output insert port  
00 – (maximum number of inputs for your model) (00 = untied)  
01 – (maximum number of outputs for your model)  
01  
(maximum number of TP inputs for your model)  
0 = audio  
1 = RS-232  
MTPX Plus 128, 168, 816, 1616  
01 – 08  
MTPX Plus 1632, 3216, 3232  
01 – 16  
X^ = RS-232 output insert status  
X& = Input signal level/peaking range  
X* = Input number  
0 = disabled  
000 – 255  
1 = enabled  
01 – (maximum number of inputs for your model)  
X( = Threshold  
X1) = Skew adjustment range  
X1! = Video plane  
0 = outside of threshold  
00 – 31 (each step = 2ns)  
1 = within threshold  
0 = red  
1 = green  
2 = blue  
X1@ = Pre-peakable output number  
MTPX Plus 168  
MTPX Plus 128, 816, 1616, 3216  
MTPX Plus 1632, 3232  
01 – 04  
01 – 08  
01 – 16  
X1# = Mute, pre-peaking, Lock mode, power supply  
X1$ = DDC value (EDID):  
0 = off/mode 0/not OK  
1 = on/mode 1/OK  
2 = mode 2  
00 = Automatic  
01 = Output 1  
02 = Output 2  
18 = 1366 x 768 @ 60 Hz  
19 = 1400 x 1050 @ 50 Hz  
20 = 1400 x 1050 @ 60 Hz  
21 = 1440 X 900 @ 50 Hz  
22 = 1440 x 900 @ 60 Hz  
23 = 1600 x 1200 @ 50 Hz  
24 = 1600 x 1200 @ 60 Hz  
25 = 1680 x 1050 @ 50 Hz  
26 = 1680 x 1050 @ 60 Hz  
27 = 1920 x 1080 @ 50 Hz  
28 = 1920 x 1080 @ 60 Hz  
29 = 1920 x 1200 @ 50 Hz  
30 = 1920 x 1200 @ 60 Hz  
31 = User defined  
03 = 800 x 600 @ 50Hz  
04 = 800 x 600 @ 60 Hz  
05 = 1024 x 768 @ 50 Hz  
06 = 1024 x 768 @ 60 Hz  
07 = 1280 x 720 @ 50 Hz  
08 = 1280 x 720 @ 60 Hz  
09 = 1280 x 768 @ 50 Hz  
10 = 1280 x 768 @ 60 Hz  
11 = 1280 x 800 @ 50 Hz  
12 = 1280 x 800 @ 60 Hz  
13 = 1280 x 1024 @ 50 Hz  
14 = 1280 x 1024 @ 60 Hz  
15 = 1360 x 768 @ 50 Hz  
16 = 1360 x 768 @ 60 Hz  
17 = 1366 x 768 @ 50 Hz  
32 = User defined  
33 = User defined  
34 = User defined  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
X1% = TP output number  
01  
(
maximum number of TP outputs for your model)  
X1^ = Local video output number  
1 or 2  
X1^is applicable to MTPX Plus 128 and matrix sizes 1632 and larger only.  
NOTE:  
X1& = Local output sync polarity  
0 = H- / V- (default)  
1 = H+ / V-  
3 = H+ / V+  
4 = No sync processing (composite, S-video, YUV)  
2 = H- / V+  
X1* = Local audio output number  
1 – 2 (MTPX Plus 128)  
1 – 4 (other matrix sizes 1616 and smaller)  
1 – 8 (matrix sizes 1632 and larger)  
X1( = Volume adjustment range  
0 – 64 (1 dB/step except for 0-to-1, which is 13 dB) (default = 64 [0 dB])  
(See the table on page 84.)  
X2) = Audio gain  
0 – 24 (1 dB/step)  
X2! = Numeric dB value  
X2@ = Audio attenuation  
X2# = Global or room preset #  
–18 to +24 (45 steps of gain or attenuation) (Default = 0 dB)  
1 – 18 (1 dB/step)  
00 - 32 (global) or 00-10 (room) (0 = current configuration)  
NOTE: A Room preset is a stored configuration with all of the outputs assigned to a single room. When a room preset is recalled from  
memory, it becomes the current configuration.  
X2$ = Name  
12 characters maximum for input, output, and global preset names  
11 characters maximum for room preset names  
Upper- and lower-case alphanumeric characters and  
_ / and spaces are valid.  
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see “Special Characters“ on page 95).  
X2% = Room # (for room presets) 10 max. (each can have up to 10 presets (X2#s) assigned)  
NOTE: A Room is a subset of operator-selected outputs that relate to each other. The MTPX Plus switchers support up to 10 rooms, each of  
which can consist of from 1 to 16 outputs.  
X2^ = Group # (for I/O grouping)  
1 through 4 groups (0 = no group)  
X2& = Audio or RS-232 mute:  
X2* = Local input select DIP switch status  
X2( = Number of inputs  
0 = no mutes  
2 = audio or RS-232 mute  
1 = local input position  
0 = RJ-45 position  
8, 12, 16, or 32  
8, 16, or 32  
X3) = Number of outputs  
X3! = Part number  
60-nnn-nn or 60-nnnn-nn  
X3@ = Firmware version number to second decimal place (x.xx)  
X3# = Verbose firmware version-description-upload date/time (see the Query firmware version (verbose) command on page 91).  
X3$ = Voltage  
Positive or negative voltage and magnitude  
X3% = Internal temperature  
X3^ = Fan speed  
Degrees Fahrenheit  
RPM  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command and Response Table for SIS Commands  
SIS Command  
(Host to Unit)  
Response  
(Unit to Host)  
Additional description  
Command Function  
Create Ties  
NOTES: Commands can be entered back-to-back in a string, with no spaces. For example: 1*1!02*02&003*003%4*8$.  
The quick multiple tie and tie input to all output commands activate all I/O switches simultaneously.  
The matrix switchers support 1-, 2-, and 3-digit numeric entries (1*1, 02*02, or 001*001).  
The &tie command for RGB and the %tie command for video can be used interchangeably on the matrix switchers).  
X!  
X@  
to output , video (V)  
X! X@  
* !  
X@  
X!  
]
X!  
to  
Tie input  
Out In All  
Tie the video and audio for input  
X@  
and audio (A)  
Example:  
X!  
output  
.
]
1*3!  
X! X@  
* &  
Out03In01All  
Tie input 1 video and audio to output 3.  
Audio breakaway.  
X@  
to output , RGB  
X@  
X!  
]
Tie input  
Out In RGB  
(video) only  
]
Example (see last Note bullet,  
above):  
10*4&  
Tie input 10 RGB to output 4.  
Out04In10RGB  
X!  
X@  
to output , video only  
X! X@  
* %  
X@  
X!  
]
Audio breakaway.  
Tie input  
Out In Vid  
]
Example (see last Note bullet,  
above):  
7*5%  
Tie input 7 video to output 5.  
Out05In07Vid  
X!  
X@  
to output , audio only  
X! X@  
* $  
X@  
X!  
]
Audio breakaway.  
Tie input  
Out In Aud  
]
Example:  
12*4$  
Tie input 12 audio to output 4.  
Out04In12Aud  
E X! X@ X! X@ }  
]
Quick multiple tie  
+Q * !... * $  
Qik  
E
}
]
Example:  
Tie input 3 video and audio to output  
4, tie input 3 video to output 5, and tie  
input 3 audio to output 6.  
+Q3*4!3*5%3*6$  
Qik  
X!  
X!  
In All  
]
]
Tie input to all outputs, video and  
audio  
*!  
Example:  
5*!  
Tie input 5 video and audio to all  
outputs.  
In05All  
NOTE: 0*! clears all ties.  
X!  
*&  
X!  
]
Tie input to all outputs, RGB (video)  
Audio breakaway.  
In RGB  
only  
]
Example (see last Note bullet,  
above):  
8*&  
Tie input 8 RGB to all outputs.  
In08RGB  
X!  
X!  
In Vid  
]
]
Tie input to all outputs, video only  
Audio breakaway.  
*%  
Example (see last Note bullet,  
above):  
10*%  
Tie input 10 video to all outputs.  
In10Vid  
X!  
*$  
X! ]  
In Aud  
Tie input to all outputs, audio only  
Audio breakaway.  
Read ties  
NOTE: The &read tie command for RGB and the %read tie command for video can be used interchangeably on the matrix switchers.  
X@  
&
X@  
%
X@  
$
X!]  
X!]  
X!]  
X!  
X@  
is tied to output .  
Read RGB (video) output tie  
Read video output tie  
RGB input  
X!  
X@  
.
Video input  
X!  
is tied to output  
is tied to output  
X@  
.
Read audio output tie  
udio input  
NOTE: X!= Input number  
X@= Output number  
00 – (maximum number of inputs for your model) (00 = untied)  
01 – (maximum number of outputs for your model)  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command/Response Table for SIS Commands (continued)  
SIS Command  
(Host to Unit)  
Response  
(Unit to Host)  
Additional description  
Command Function  
Audio/RS-232 TP input (wire pair 3 and 6) configuration  
EX%  
}
NOTE: The RS-232 output insert ports, when enabled ( *1Lrpt ), override the audio/RS-232 TP input configurations.  
For the MTPX Plus 128, these commands are valid for inputs 5 through 12 only.  
X*  
*0\  
X*  
*1\  
X*  
\
X* ]  
Typ *0  
Configure input as audio  
Configure input as RS-232  
Read TP input configuration  
Define the audio/RS-232 input as  
audio, such as provided by an MTP  
15HD A transmitter.  
X* ]  
Typ *1  
Define the audio/RS-232 input as serial  
communications, such as provided by  
an MTP 15HD RS transmitter.  
X$]  
Show the audio/RS-232 wire pair input  
definition.  
RS-232 output inserts enable  
Disable an RS-232 output insert port  
EX%  
EX%  
EX%  
}
}
X% ]  
Lrpt *0  
X%  
*0Lrpt  
Disable the RS-232 insert on the  
output.  
X% ]  
Lrpt *1  
X%  
Enable an RS-232 output insert port  
*1Lrpt  
Enable the RS-232 insert on the  
output.  
}
X^]  
Read RS-232 output insert status  
Show the status of the RS-232 output  
insert.  
Lrpt  
Input signal level/peaking and auto calibrate  
EX* X&  
}
X* X&]  
Ipek *  
Set input signal level  
Set a specific pre-peak level for the TP  
input.  
* Ipek  
EX*  
}
X* X&]  
Ipek *  
Increment input peaking  
Increase the input pre-peaking level  
by 1  
+Ipek  
EX*  
EX*  
EX*  
}
X* X&]  
Ipek *  
Decrement input peaking  
Read input peaking setting  
Execute auto calibration  
Decrease the pre-peaking level by 1.  
-Ipek  
}
X&]  
Ipek  
}
X* ]  
Aadj *2 {start}  
X*  
*0AADJ  
Tie input  
to output 1 and auto  
X*  
]
X(  
Qik {tie creation}  
adjust the peaking on input . The  
X* X(]  
Aadj *  
{finished}  
{new value}  
value in the response reports whether  
the adjustment value was within or  
outside of the threshold.  
X* X&]  
Ipek *  
NOTES: • Before issuing the auto calibration command:  
1. Disconnect the power and RJ-45 cables at the MTP transmitter connected to  
X*  
.
Pre-Peak  
is on  
2. Connect the two cables to the MTP signal generator (included with most models,  
optional for the MTPX Plus 128).  
3. If the input cable is longer than 300 feet (90 m), place the Pre-Peak switch on the MTP  
signal generator to on (up when the RJ-45 connector on the signal generator is to the  
right as shown at right). If the cable is shorter than 300 feet (90 m), place the switch  
down.  
The MTP signal generator does not work on cable lengths over 400 feet (120 m). Set the level/  
peaking to its maximum value of 255.  
NOTE: X#= TP input number  
X$= Audio/RS-232 wire pair input type  
01 – (maximum number of TP inputs for your model)  
0 = audio  
1 = RS-232  
X%= RS-232 output insert port  
X^= RS-232 output insert status  
MTPX Plus 128, 168, 816, 1616  
MTPX Plus 1632, 3216, 3232  
0 = disabled  
01 – 08  
01 – 16  
1 = enabled  
X&= Input signal level/peaking range  
X*= Input number  
X(= Threshold  
000 – 255  
01 – (maximum number of inputs for your model)  
0 = outside of threshold 1 = within threshold  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Command/Response Table for SIS Commands (continued)  
SIS Command  
(Host to Unit)  
Response  
(Unit to Host)  
Additional description  
Command Function  
Input skew adjustment  
NOTE: For the MTPX Plus 128, these commands are valid for inputs 5 through 12 only.  
EX# X1) X1) X1)  
Iseq  
}
Set all input skew adjustment values  
Set a specific skew adjustment for the TP  
*
*
*
X1)  
input.  
values are listed in RGB order.  
X# X1) X1) X1)]  
Iseq  
]
Iseq02*00*00*04  
*
*
*
E
}
Example:  
Set skew settings for input 2 as follows:  
2*0*0*4Iseq  
Red = 0 ns  
Green = 0 ns  
Blue = 8 ns (delayed 8 ns).  
X1!  
EX# X1!  
}
X# X1) X1) X1)]  
Increment one input skew  
adjustment value  
*
+Iseq  
Iseq  
Iseq02*00*00*05  
X1) X1) X1)]  
*
*
*
Increase the  
plane skew  
X#  
adjustment for input  
by 1 step (2 ns).  
E
}
]
Example:  
Increase the blue skew for input 2 by 2 ns  
to 10 ns.  
2*2+Iseq  
EX# X1!  
}
X1!  
plane skew adjustment  
by 1 step (2 ns).  
Decrement one input skew  
adjustment value  
*
-Iseq  
IseqX#*  
*
*
Decrease the  
X#  
for input  
EX#  
}
X1) X1) X1)]  
Read input skew adjustment values  
Iseq  
*
*
EDID commands  
NOTE: For the MTPX Plus 128, these commands are valid for inputs 1 through 4 only.  
E X* X1$  
}
X* X1$]  
Assign EDID data to an input  
Assign EDID data to all inputs  
A
*
EDID  
EdidA  
*
E
E
X1$  
}
X1$]  
EdidA0*  
A* *EDID  
X1$  
S* EDID  
}
X1$]  
X1$  
value must  
Save output #1 EDID data to a user-  
defined space  
EdidS  
For this command, the  
be from 31 to 34.  
E
X*  
A* EDID  
}
X1$]  
View EDID data assigment  
Output pre-peaking  
Set output pre-peaking on  
Set output pre-peaking off  
Read output pre-peaking setting  
EX1@  
EX1@  
EX1@  
}
X1@  
]
]
Pre-peak the TP output.  
Do not pre-peak the TP output.  
*1Opek  
Opek *1  
}
X1@  
Opek *0  
X1#]  
*0Opek  
}
Opek  
NOTE: X# = TP input number  
X* = Input number  
01 – (maximum number of TP inputs for your model)  
01 – (maximum number of inputs for your model)  
X1) = Skew adjustment range  
X1! = Video plane  
00 – 31 (each step = 2 ns)  
0 = red  
1 = green  
2 = blue  
X1@ = Pre-peakable output number  
MTPX Plus 168  
MTPX Plus 128, 816, 1616, 3216  
MTPX Plus 1632, 3232  
0 = off  
01 – 04  
01 – 08  
01 – 16  
X1# = Pre-peaking  
1 = on  
X1$ = DDC value (EDID)  
See page 78.  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command/Response Table for SIS Commands (continued)  
SIS Command  
(Host to Unit)  
Response  
(Unit to Host)  
Additional description  
Command Function  
Local video output sync polarity  
NOTE: The command structure differs, depending on the size of the matrix. Matrix sizes 816, 168, and 1616 do not need the local  
X1^  
output variable ( ). Matrix sizes 128, 1632, 3216, and 3232 require the variable.  
EX1&  
}
X1&]  
]
Set local output polarity  
(matrix size 816, 168, and 1616)  
Set the horizontal and vertical sync  
polarity for a local output.  
Opol  
Opol  
E
}
Example:  
Set the local output to output negative  
horizontal and vertical sync.  
0Opol  
Opol0  
EX1^ X1&  
}
X1^ X1&]  
Opol *  
Set local output polarity  
(matrix size 128, 1632, 3216, and  
3232)  
Set the horizontal and vertical sync  
* Opol  
X1^  
polarity for local output  
.
E
E
}
]
Example:  
Set local output 2 to output negative  
horizontal and vertical sync.  
2*0Opol  
Opol2*0  
X1&]  
}
Read local output sync settings  
(matrix size 816, 168, and 1616)  
Opol  
EX1^  
}
X1&]  
Read local output sync settings  
(matrix size 128, 1632, 3216, and  
3232)  
Opol  
Output skew adjustment  
Set all output skew adjustment  
EX@ X1) X1) X1)  
* * * Oseq  
}
Set a specific skew adjustment for the  
X1)  
values  
TP output.  
order.  
values are listed in RGB  
X@ X1) X1) X1)]  
Oseq * * *  
E
}
]
Example:  
Set the output 2 skew settings as  
2*0*0*4Oseq  
Oseq02*0*0*4  
follows:  
Red = 0 ns  
Green = 0 ns  
Blue = 8 ns (delayed 8 ns).  
X1!  
EX@ X1!  
* +Oseq  
}
X@ X1) X1) X1)]  
Oseq * * *  
Increment one output skew  
adjustment value  
Increase the  
plane skew  
X@  
adjustment output  
by 1 step (2 ns).  
EX@ X1!  
* -Oseq  
}
X@ X1) X1) X1)]  
Oseq * * *  
X1!  
plane skew  
Decrement one output skew  
adjustment value  
Decrease the  
X@  
adjustment output  
by 1 step (2 ns).  
E
}
]
Example:  
Decrease the output 2 blue skew by 2 ns  
to 6 ns.  
2*2-Oseq  
Oseq02*0*0*3  
EX@  
Oseq  
}
X1) X1) X1)]  
Read output skew adjustment values  
* *  
NOTE: X@= Output number  
01 – (maximum number of outputs for your model)  
X1)= Skew adjustment range  
X1!= Video plane  
00 – 31 (each step = 2ns)  
0 = red  
1 = green  
2 = blue  
X1^= Local video output number  
X1&= Local output sync polarity  
1 or 2 (X1^ applies to matrix sizes 128, 1632, 3216, and 3232 only)  
0 = H- / V- (default)  
1 = H+ / V-  
2 = H- / V+  
3 = H+ / V+  
4 = No sync processing (composite, S-video, YUV)  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command/Response Table for SIS Commands (continued)  
SIS Command  
(Host to Unit)  
Response  
(Unit to Host)  
Additional description  
Command Function  
Audio output volume  
NOTE: The table below the commands defines the value of each audio volume step.  
X1* X1(  
X1*  
Out Vol  
X1(]  
Set the audio volume to a specific  
value  
* V  
]
Example:  
1*50v  
Set output 1 volume to 79%.  
Increment volume by 1 step.  
Out01Vol50  
X1*  
X1*  
Out Vol  
X1(]  
Increment volume  
Example:  
+V  
]
1+V  
Out01Vol51  
X1*  
X1*  
X1(]  
Decrement volume  
Read output volume  
Decrease volume by 1 step.  
-V  
Out Vol  
X1*  
X1(]  
V
dB of  
Output  
dB of  
Output  
dB of  
Output  
X19 value  
X19 value  
X19 value  
attenuation volume  
attenuation volume  
attenuation volume  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
76  
63  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
0%  
5.5%  
7%  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
38.5%  
40%  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
71.5%  
73%  
8.5%  
10%  
41.5%  
43%  
74.5%  
76%  
11.5%  
13%  
44.5%  
46%  
77.5%  
79%  
14.5%  
16%  
47.5%  
49%  
80.5%  
82%  
17.5%  
19%  
50.5%  
52%  
83.5%  
85%  
20.5%  
22%  
53.5%  
55%  
86.5%  
88%  
8
23.5%  
25%  
56.5%  
58%  
7
89.5%  
91%  
6
26.5%  
28%  
59.5%  
61%  
5
92.5%  
94%  
4
29.5%  
31%  
62.5%  
64%  
3
95.5%  
97%  
2
32.5%  
34%  
65.5%  
67%  
1
98.5%  
100%  
0
35.5%  
37%  
68.5%  
70%  
NOTE: X1*= Local audio output number  
X1(= Volume adjustment range  
1 – 2 (MTPX Plus 128)  
1 – 4 (other matrix sizes 1616 and smaller)  
1 – 8 (matrix sizes 1632 and larger)  
0 – 64 (1 dB/step except for 0-to-1, which is 13 dB)  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Command/Response Table for SIS Commands (continued)  
SIS Command  
(Host to Unit)  
Response  
(Unit to Host)  
Additional description  
Command Function  
Audio input gain and attenuation  
NOTE: The set gain (G) and set attenuation (g) commands are case sensitive.  
X! X2)  
X!  
In Aud  
X2!]  
]
Set audio input gain to +dB value  
* G  
Example:  
1*2G  
Set input 1 audio gain to +2 dB.  
Increase gain by 1 dB.  
In1Aud+02  
X! X2@  
X!  
X2!]  
Set audio input attenuation to -dB  
value  
* g  
In Aud  
X!  
+G  
X!  
X2!]  
]
Increment gain  
In Aud  
Example:  
5+G  
Increase audio input 5 level from +2 dB  
to +3 dB.  
In5Aud+03  
X!  
-G  
X!  
X2!]  
Decrement gain  
Decrease gain by 1 dB.  
In Aud  
]
Example:  
7-G  
Decrease audio input 7 level from -8  
In7Aud-09  
dB to -9 dB.  
X!  
G
X2!]  
Read input gain  
]
Example:  
3G  
Audio input 3 level is at -6 dB.  
-06  
Audio or RS-232 mute commands  
X@  
*1Z  
X@  
*0Z  
X@  
Z
X@ ]  
X@  
Audio or RS-232 mute  
Amt *1  
Mute output  
(audio off).  
audio or RS-232  
X@ ]  
Amt *0  
X@  
Audio or RS-232 unmute  
Unmute output  
audio or RS-232  
(audio on).  
X1#]  
Read audio or RS-232 mute  
Global audio or RS-232 mute  
Global audio or RS-232 unmute  
1 = mute on, 0 = mute off.  
]
Amt1  
1*Z  
0*Z  
Mute all audio or RS-232 outputs.  
Unmute all audio or RS-232 outputs.  
]
Amt0  
Names  
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see “Special Characters“ on page 95).  
Write global preset name  
EX2# X2$ }  
X2# X2$]  
Nmg ,  
Nmg01,Security1  
X2$]  
, NG  
E
}
Example:  
Name global preset 1 “Security 1”.  
1,Security1NG  
]
EX2# }  
Read global preset name  
Example:  
NG  
E
}
]
2NG  
Security2  
Write room preset name  
EX2% X2# X2$ }  
X2% X2# X2$]  
Nmp * ,  
* , NP  
Example:  
Name room 1, preset 3 “Podium_DVD”.  
E
}
1*3,Podium_DVDNP  
]
Nmp01*3,Podium_DVD  
X2$]  
Read room preset name  
EX2% X2# }  
, NP  
X2$  
NOTES: If a preset is unassigned, the  
displays [unassigned].  
X2#  
If a global preset is saved, but not yet named, the default name is Preset  
X2%  
.
X2#  
.
If a room preset is saved, but not yet named, the default name is Rm  
Prst  
NOTE: X!= Input number  
X@= Output number  
X*= Input number  
01 – (maximum number of inputs for your model)  
01 – (maximum number of outputs for your model)  
01 – (maximum number of inputs for your model)  
X1#= Mute  
0 = off  
1 = on  
X2)= Audio gain  
0 – 24 (1 dB/step)  
X2!= Numeric dB value  
X2@= Audio attenuation  
X2#= Global or room preset #  
X2$= Name  
–18 to +24 (45 steps of gain or attenuation) (Default = 0 dB)  
1 – 18 (1 dB/step)  
01 - 32, 10 maximum for a room preset  
11 characters for room preset names  
X2%= Room # (for room presets)  
10 max. (each can have up to 10 presets (X2#s) assigned)  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command/Response Table for SIS Commands (continued)  
SIS Command  
(Host to Unit)  
Response  
(Unit to Host)  
Additional description  
Command Function  
Names (continued)  
Write input name  
EX* X2$ }  
X* X2$]  
Nmi ,  
, NI  
Example:  
Name input 1 “Podium cam”.  
Name output 1 “Main PJ1”.  
E
}
]
1,PodiumcamNI  
NI  
Nmi01,Podiumcam  
EX* }  
X2$]  
Read input name  
Write output name  
EX@ X2$ }  
X@ X2$]  
, NO  
1,MainPJ1NO  
Nmo ,  
Nmo01,MainPJ1  
E
}
]
Example:  
EX@ }  
X2$]  
Read output name  
NO  
I/O Grouping  
X2^  
NOTE: The group that is assigned in each of the following I/O grouping commands ( ) must be 1, 2, 3, 4, or 0 (not grouped).  
1
2
n
1
2
3
n
EX2^ X2^ X2^ }  
...  
X2^ X2^ X2^ X2^ ]  
Gri ...  
Write input grouping  
n = the maximum number of inputs.  
X2^  
I
Each  
entry is the group  
number assigned to an input  
position, starting from input 1.  
}
]
Example: MTPX Plus 168  
E4013300004440443I  
Gri4013300004440443 (seebelow)  
Input 1 in group 4 Input 2 not grouped Input 12 in group 4 Input 1 - Group 4, Input 2 - Group 0  
(not grouped), ... Input 16 - Group 3.  
Response #s = group: Gri 4 0 1 3 3 0 0 0 0 4 4 4 0 4 4 3  
Input: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
X2^  
NOTE: You must enter an  
value for each input in your matrix size, such as 32 inputs for an MTPX Plus 3216.  
1
2
n
1
2
3
n
X2^ X2^ X2^ }  
...  
X2^ X2^ X2^ X2^ ]  
...  
Write output grouping  
n = the maximum number of outputs.  
X2^  
E
O
Gro  
Each  
entry is the group number  
assigned to an output position, starting  
from output 2.  
1
2
3
n
}
EI  
X2^ X2^ X2^ X2^ ]  
Read input grouping  
n = the maximum number of inputs.  
...  
X2^  
Each  
entry is the group number  
assigned to an output position, starting  
from input 1.  
}
EI  
]
Example: MTPX Plus 1616  
11113300004440444 (seebelow)  
Input 1 in group 1  
Input 8 not grouped Input 12 in group 4  
Response = group: 1 1 1 3 3 0 0 0 0 4 4 4 0 4 4 4  
Input: 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
2
3
n
}
X2^ X2^ X2^ X2^ ]  
...  
Read output grouping  
n = the maximum number of outputs.  
EO  
Save, recall, and directly write global presets  
NOTE: If you try to recall a preset that is not saved, the matrix switcher responds with the error code E11.  
X2#  
X2#]  
Save current configuration as a  
global preset  
Command character is a comma.  
,
Spr  
]
Example:  
8,  
Save current ties as preset 8.  
Spr08  
X2#  
X2#]  
Recall a global preset  
Example:  
Command character is a period.  
.
Rpr  
]
5.  
Rpr05  
Recall preset 5, which becomes the  
current configuration.  
NOTE: X@= Output number  
X*= Input number  
01 – (maximum number of outputs for your model)  
01 – (maximum number of inputs for your model)  
01 - 32, 10 maximum for a room preset  
X2#= Global or room preset #  
X2%= Room # (for room presets)  
X2^= Group #  
10 max. (each can have up to 10 presets (X2#s) assigned)  
1 through 4 groups (0 = no group)  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command/Response Table for SIS Commands (continued)  
SIS Command  
(Host to Unit)  
Response  
(Unit to Host)  
Additional description  
Command Function  
Save, recall, and directly write global presets (continued)  
Direct write process —  
NOTE: The direct write of a global preset should always be preceded by a clear global preset ties command of that same preset number,  
as shown below. In a directly-written preset, the input for each output position (or no tied input) remains unchanged unless  
overwritten or cleared.  
If you do not clear the ties in a global preset number before you directly write a global preset to that number, ties that are part of  
the previous version of the specified preset with the same number can unexpectedly become part of the newly-created preset.  
E X2#  
+ P0*!  
}
X2#]  
X2#  
Clear all ties in preset .  
Clear global preset ties  
Spr  
E X2# X! X@ X! X@ X! X@  
X! X@ }  
Directly write a global preset  
The tie all (!), tie RGB (&),  
tie video (%), and tie audio ($)  
commands are all valid.  
+ P * ! * % * $... * &  
X2#]  
Spr  
E
}
]
Example:  
Clear all ties in preset 27.  
+27P0*!  
Spr27  
Brackets are shown to separate ties for  
clarity only. Create global preset 27,  
which ties video and audio input 12 to  
output 5, video input 10 to output 9,  
audio input 3 to output 2, and video  
input 3 to output 8.  
Esc  
+27P12*5!10*09%3*2$3*8&  
]
Spr27  
1
2
n
1
2
n
EX2% X@ X@  
X@  
]
X2% X@ X@  
Mpr , , ,...  
X@ ]  
Write room outputs  
, , ,... MR  
See notes.  
X@  
NOTES: A room can contain a maximum of 16 outputs ( s).  
An output can belong to only one room.  
X2%  
The maximum number of rooms ( s) is 10.  
X2%  
If no room name is assigned, the default name is “Room # .”  
Example:  
E
}
]
8,3,04,5,6MR  
Mpr8,03,04,05,06  
Outputs 3, 4, 5, and 6 are  
assigned to room 8.  
1
2
n
EX2% }  
MR  
X2# X@ X@ X@ ]  
, , ,...  
Read room outputs  
E
}
]
Class1,01,02,08,09  
Example:  
Outputs 1, 2, 8, and 9 are assigned to  
room 3, which named “Class 1”.  
3MR  
X2%  
X2#]  
Recall room preset  
Command character is a period.  
Rmm Rpr  
X2% X2#  
* .  
E X2% X2#  
+ * P0*!  
]
X2%  
Rmm Spr  
X2#]  
X2#  
X2#  
preset .  
Clear room preset ties  
Clear all ties in room  
E X2% X2# X! X@ X! X@ X! X@  
X! X@ }  
Directly write a room preset  
Enter as many ties as are valid for this  
model. Tie all (!), tie RGB (&), tie video  
(%), and tie audio ($) commands are  
all valid.  
+ * P * ! * % * $... * &  
X2%  
Rmm Spr  
X2#]  
Example:  
Brackets are shown to separate ties for  
clarity only. Create preset 3 for room 7,  
which ties audio input 12 to output 7,  
video input 11 to output 5, RGB input  
4 to output 5, and video and audio  
input 6 to output 6.  
Esc  
+7*3P12*7&11*5$4*5%6*6!  
Rmm07Spr03  
]
Lock (executive) modes  
NOTE: See “Setting the Front Panel Locks (Executive Modes)” in the “Operation” section for more information on the Lock modes.  
]
]
]
Lock all front panel functions  
1X  
Enable Lock mode 1.  
Enable Lock mode 2.  
Enable Lock mode 0.  
Exe1  
Exe2  
Exe0  
Lock advanced front panel functions 2X  
Unlock all front panel functions  
View lock status  
0X  
X
X1#]  
NOTE: X!= Input number  
X@= Output number  
X1#= Lock mode  
01 – (maximum number of inputs for your model)  
01 – (maximum number of outputs for your model)  
0 = mode 0  
01 - 32, 10 maximum for a room preset  
10 max. (each can have up to 10 presets (X2#s) assigned)  
1 = mode 1  
2 = mode 2  
X2#= Global or room preset #  
X2%= Room # (for room presets)  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command/Response Table for SIS Commands (continued)  
SIS Command  
(Host to Unit)  
Response  
(Unit to Host)  
Additional description  
Command Function  
Resets  
Reset all input level and peaking  
adjustments  
E }  
]
Clear all level and peaking adjustments  
to their default (0) values.  
ZT  
Zpt  
E }  
]
Reset all input and output skew  
adjustments  
Clear all input and output skew values  
to 0 ns.  
ZK  
Zpk  
E }  
]
Reset global presets and names  
Reset one global preset  
Clear all global presets and their names.  
ZG  
Zpg  
EX2# }  
X2#]  
X2#  
.
ZG  
Zpg  
Clear global preset  
E }  
]
Reset audio input levels  
Reset all audio input levels (gain and  
ZA  
Zpa  
attenuation) to 0 dB.  
E }  
]
Reset audio output levels  
Reset all mutes  
Reset all audio output levels (volume)  
to 100% (no attenuation).  
ZV  
Zpv  
E }  
]
Reset all audio or RS-232 outputs to  
unmuted.  
ZZ  
Zpz  
E }  
]
Reset room map (outputs)  
Reset individual room  
Clear all room definitions.  
ZR  
Zpr  
EX2% }  
X2%]  
X2%  
.
ZR  
Zpr  
Delete room  
E }  
]
Reset all room presets and names  
Reset individual room preset and name  
Reset whole switcher  
Clear an individual room preset and name.  
Clear an individual room preset and name.  
ZP  
Zpp  
EX2% X2# }  
X2% X2#]  
Zpp *  
* ZP  
E
}
]
Clear all ties and presets, reset all audio  
ZXXX  
Zpx  
gains to 0 dB, and reset volume to 100%.  
E
}
]
Absolute reset  
Similar to Reset whole switcher, plus  
clear the IP address to 192.168.254.254  
and subnet mask to 255.255.000.000.  
ZQQQ  
Zpq  
View ties, gain, volume, mutes, presets, and DIP switch status  
X@  
X!]  
X!  
X@  
is tied to output  
(video) output tie  
Read RGB  
&
RGB input  
Input 12 RGB is tied to output 5.  
X! X@  
.
]
Example:  
5&  
12  
X@  
X!]  
Read video output tie  
Example:  
%
RGB input  
Input 2 video is tied to output 7.  
X! X@  
is tied to output  
.
]
7%  
02  
X@  
X!]  
Read audio output tie  
Example:  
$
Audio input  
is tied to output  
.
]
3$  
06  
Input 6 audio is tied to output 3.  
Volume for output 7 is 55%.  
Audio input 3 level is -2 dB.  
X1*  
X1(]  
View output volume  
Example:  
V
]
7V  
55  
X*  
X2!]  
View input gain  
Example:  
G
]
4G  
-02  
NOTE: X!= Input number  
X@= Output number  
00 – (maximum number of inputs for your model)  
01 – (maximum number of outputs for your model)  
01 – (maximum number of inputs for your model)  
1 – 2 (MTPX Plus 128)  
X*= Input number  
X1*= Local audio output number  
1 – 4 (matrix sizes 1616 and smaller)  
1 – 8 (matrix sizes 1632 and larger)  
X1(= Volume adjustment range  
X2!= Numeric dB value  
X2#= Global or room preset #  
X2%= Room # (for room presets)  
0 – 64 (1 dB/step except for 0-to-1, which is 22 dB)  
–18 to +24 (45 steps of gain or attenuation) (Default = 0 dB)  
01 - 32 (global) or 01-10 (room)  
10 max. (each can have up to 10 presets (X2#s) assigned  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command/Response Table for SIS Commands (continued)  
SIS Command  
(Host to Unit)  
Response  
(Unit to Host)  
Additional description  
Command Function  
View ties, gain, volume, mutes, presets, and DIP switch status (continued)  
1
2
n
E }  
X2& X2&  
X2&  
]
X2&  
View output mutes  
VM  
...  
Mut  
Each response is the mute status of  
an output: left = output 1,  
right = output n. n = the highest  
output number for this model.  
E }  
]
Mut0220200002202000  
Example (MTPX Plus 3216):  
VM  
Output 1 is unmuted, output 2 video  
is muted, output 3 video and audio are  
muted, and output 4 audio is muted.  
Outputs 5 through 8 are not present  
on this switcher.  
NOTE: The “Mut” portion of the response appears only when the switcher is in Verbose mode 1 or 3 (see the Set verbose mode SIS  
command on page 95).  
n
n+1  
n+1  
n+2  
n+15  
EX2# X@  
* *1VC  
}
X! X! X! X!  
X!  
]
View video global preset  
configuration  
•...•  
Vid  
Show the video configuration for  
X2#  
preset  
. Show the input tied to  
16 sequential outputs, starting from  
X@  
output  
.
Command description:  
Response description:  
preset #*starting output # (StO#)*1(=video)VC  
input # (I#) tied to StO#•I# tied to StO#+1•I# tied to StO#+2• ... •I# tied to StO#+15•Vid  
]
X@  
NOTES: The starting output number ( ) should always be “1” for matrix sizes of 16 outputs or smaller.  
EX2# X@  
}
X2#  
*
*1VC where  
= 0 returns the current video configuration.  
E
}
Example (MTPX Plus 168):  
3*1*1VC  
input 8 tied to output 4  
input 12 tied to output 3 no tied input outputs do not exist  
Response = tied input: 0808120808110000•--•--•--•--•--•--•--•--•Vid  
Output:  
09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Each position shown in the response is an output: left = starting output (1), right = starting output  
+15 (16). (Outputs 9 through 16 are not present on the MTPX Plus 168.) The number in each  
position is the input tied to that output.  
In this example, preset 3, video input 8 is tied to outputs 1, 2, 4, and 5; input 12 is tied to output 3;  
and input 11 is tied to output 6. No inputs are tied to outputs 7 and 8.  
NOTE: X!= Input number  
X@= Output number  
00 – (maximum number of inputs for your model)  
01 – (maximum number of outputs for your model)  
X2#= Global or room preset #  
X2&= Audio or RS-232 mute:  
01 - 32 (global) or 01-10 (room)  
0 = no mutes  
2 = audio or RS-232 mute  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command/Response Table for SIS Commands (continued)  
SIS Command  
(Host to Unit)  
Response  
(Unit to Host)  
Additional description  
Command Function  
View ties, gain, volume, mutes, presets, and DIP switch status (continued)  
n
n+1  
n+1  
n+2  
n+15  
EX2# X@  
}
X! X! X! X!  
X!  
]
View audio global preset  
* *2VC  
•...•  
Aud  
configuration  
Show the audio configuration for preset  
X2#  
. Show the input tied to 16 sequential  
X@  
.
outputs, starting from output  
Command description:  
Response description:  
preset #*starting output # (StO#)*2(=audio)VC  
input # (I#) tied to StO#•I# tied to StO#+1•I# tied to StO#+2• ... •I# tied to StO#15•Aud  
X@  
]
NOTES: The starting output number ( ) should always be “1” for matrix sizes of 16 outputs or smaller.  
EX2# X@  
}
X2#  
*
*2VC where  
= 0 returns the current audio configuration.  
E
}
Example: (MTPX Plus 1632)  
15*17*2VC  
input 1 tied to output 19  
no tied input  
Response = tied input: 01010101021212000000000001081516Aud  
Output: 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32  
Each position shown in the response is an output: left = starting output (17), right =  
starting output +15 (32). The number in each position is the input tied to that output.  
In this example, preset 15, audio input 1 is tied to outputs 17, 18, 19, 20, and 29; input 2 is tied  
to output 21; input 12 is tied to outputs 22 and 23; input 8 is tied to output 30; input 15 is tied to  
output 31; and input 16 is tied to output 32. No input is tied to output 24, 25, 26, 27, and 28.  
n
n+1  
n+1  
n+2  
n+15  
EX2% X2#  
* *1*1VC  
}
X! X! X! X!  
X!  
]
View video room preset  
configuration  
•...•  
Vid  
Show the video configuration for room  
X2% X2#  
, preset  
. Show the input tied to  
X2%  
up to 16 outputs assigned to room  
.
Command description:  
Response description:  
room #*room preset #*starting output # (StO#)*1(=video)VC  
input # (I#) tied to StO#•I# tied to StO#+1•I# tied to StO#+2• ... •I# tied to StO#+15•Vid  
]
X@  
NOTE: The starting output number ( ) should always be “1” for matrix sizes of 16 outputs or smaller.  
n
n+1  
n+1  
n+2  
n+15  
EX2% X2#  
* *1*2VC  
}
X! X! X! X!  
X!  
]
View audio room preset  
configuration  
•...•  
Aud  
Show audio configuration for room  
X2#  
X2%  
,
preset  
. Show the input tied to up to  
X2%  
16 outputs assigned to room  
.
Command description:  
Response description:  
room #*room preset #*starting output # (StO#)*2(=audio)VC  
input # (I#) tied to StO#•I# tied to StO#+1•I# tied to StO#+2• ... •I# tied to StO#+15•Aud  
]
X@  
NOTE: The starting output number ( ) should always be “1” for matrix sizes of 16 outputs or smaller.  
n
1
2
3
E
}
X2*  
Each is the position for that rear panel  
Input Select DIP switch from 1 to n. n = 3  
for matrix sizes up to 1616, n = 6 for  
View Input Select DIP switch  
positions and level/peaking status  
Stat  
X2* X2* X2* X2* X(]  
...  
*
X(  
matrix sizes of 1632 and larger.  
indicates whether the input level/peaking  
is within the pre-determined threshold  
for the input tied to output 1 only.  
NOTE: This command is invalid for the MTPX Plus 128 only.  
NOTE: X!= Input number  
X@= Output number  
00 – (maximum number of inputs for your model)  
01 – (maximum number of outputs for your model)  
X(= Threshold  
0 = outside of threshold  
01 - 32 (global) or 01-10 (room)  
10 max. (each can have up to 10 presets (X2#s) assigned  
1 = within threshold  
X2#= Global or room preset #  
X2%= Room # (for room presets)  
X2*= Local input select DIP switch status  
0 = RJ-45 position  
1 = local input position  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Command/Response Table for SIS Commands (continued)  
SIS Command  
(Host to Unit)  
Response  
(Unit to Host)  
Additional description  
Command Function  
View ties, gain, volume, mutes, presets, and DIP switch status (continued)  
NOTE: The response to the View File Directory command differs, depending on whether the command is sent via an RS-232/RS-422 or  
Telnet connection or sent via a Web browser connection.  
E }  
View file directory  
RS-232/RS-422 port and Telnet  
filename1,date/time,length]  
filename2,date/time,length]  
filename3,date/time,length]  
DF  
filenamen,date/time,length]  
]
# of Bytes•Left]  
List user-supplied files.  
List user-supplied files.  
E }  
View file directory  
Web browser  
DF  
Var file = new array ();  
File [1] = ‘filename1,date1,filesize1‘;  
File [2] = ‘filename2,date2,filesize2‘;  
File [3] = ‘filename3,date3,filesize3‘;  
File [n] = ‘filenamen,daten,filesizen‘;  
File [n+1] = # of Bytes•Left  
E
}
]
Erase user-supplied Web pages/files  
filenameEF  
Delfilename  
Information requests  
Information request  
X2( X3) X2( X3)]  
I
N
V X A X  
V (video) matrix size•  
A (audio) matrix size  
X3!]  
Request part number  
Accessories” in the “Reference  
Information” section.  
NOTE: There are up to three separate sets of Extron firmware on which the switcher can report: the controller firmware, which is the  
overall control firmware; the Ethernet protocol firmware, which handles the Ethernet interface; and the latest optional Extron  
firmware update, which is available at www.extron.com.  
X3@]  
Query controller firmware version  
Q
Q
]
Example:  
The factory-installed controller firmware  
version is 1.23 (sample value only).  
1.23  
X3@ X3# X3#]  
Query controller firmware version  
(verbose)  
0Q  
Provide a detailed status of the MTPX  
Plus controller firmware and any  
firmware upgrade. The firmware that  
is running is marked by an asterisk (*).  
A caret (^) indicates that the firmware  
has a bad checksum or an invalid load.  
?.?? indicates that firmware is not  
loaded.  
- -  
Response description: Ethernet protocol firmware version-controller firmware version-updated firmware version]  
Example:  
0q  
Description  
* indicates the version running  
Upload date and time  
1.23-1.00(1.06-16x16 Series -Tue, 04 Dec 2007 00:00:00 GMT)-1.00*(1.06-16x16 Series -Thu, 27 Dec 2006 16:39:21 GMT)  
Ethernet protocol  
firmware  
MTPX firmware version  
Updated firmware version  
NOTE: X2(= Number of inputs  
X3)= Number of outputs  
X3!= Part number  
8, 12, 16, or 32  
8, 16, or 32  
60-nnn-nn  
X3@= Firmware version number to second decimal place (x.xx)  
X3#= Verbose firmware version-description-upload date/time  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SIS Command  
(Host to Unit)  
Response  
(Unit to Host)  
Additional description  
Command Function  
Information requests (continued)  
Request system status  
S
See below  
X3$ X3$ X3$ X3$ X3$ X3% X3^ X3^ X3^]  
MTPX Plus 128:  
X3$ X3$ X3$ X3$ X3$ X3% X3^ X3^]  
Other matrix sizes 1616 and smaller:  
Matrix sizes 1632 and larger:  
X3$ X3$ X3$ X3$ X3$ X3$ X3$ X3% X3^ X3^ X3^]  
Response description (MTPX Plus 128):  
]
]
]
+3.3V+5V-5V+12V-12Vtemperature(degreesFahrenheit)Fan1speedFan2Fan3  
Response description (other matrix sizes 1616 and smaller):  
+3.3V+5V-5V+12V-12Vtemperature(degreesFahrenheit)Fan1speedFan2  
Response description (matrix sizes 1632 and larger):  
+3.3V+5V-5V+12V-12V+2.5V-2.5Vtemperature(degreesFahrenheit)Fan1speedFan2Fan3  
NOTE: Fans are numbered 1, 2, 3, from rear to front.  
Example (MTPX Plus 128):  
S
+12V power system at 11.52V  
+3.28+4.98-5.01+11.52•-12.35+086.80035900366803668  
+3.3V power system at 3.28V  
Fan 1 (rear) rotating at 3590 RPM  
NOTE: X3$= Voltage  
X3%= Temperature  
X3^= Fan speed  
Positive or negative voltage and magnitude  
Degrees Fahrenheit  
RPM  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Symbol definitions  
X4) = Matrix name  
(Up to 240 alphanumeric characters)  
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see “Special Characters“ on page 95).  
X4! = Default name  
MTPX- + last 3 pairs of MAC address  
X4@ = Time and date (for set)  
In the format: MM/DD/YY•HH:MM:SS where:  
MM = month: 01 (January) through 12 (December)  
DD = 01 through 31  
YY = 00 through 99  
HH = 00 through 23  
MM = 00 through 59  
SS = 00 through 59  
X4# = Time and date (for read)  
In the format: Day,•DD•Mmm•YYYY•HH:MM:SS where:  
Day of the week: Mon through Sun  
DD = 01 through 31  
Mmm = month: Jan through Dec  
YYYY = 2000 through 2099  
HH = 00 through 23  
MM = 00 through 59  
SS = 00 through 59  
X4$ = GMT offset  
–12.0 through +14.0. Hours and minutes removed from GMT  
X4% = Daylight Savings Time  
0 = Daylight Savings Time off/ignore  
1 = Daylight Savings Time on (northern hemisphere)  
2 = Daylight Savings Time on (Europe)  
3 = Daylight Savings Time on (Brazil)  
X4^ = IP address  
###.###.###.###  
X4& = Hardware (MAC) address  
X4* = Number of open connections  
X4( = Password  
##-##-##-##-##-##  
000 - 200  
Up to 12 alphanumeric characters  
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see “Special Characters“ on page 95).  
X5) = Domain name Standard domain name rules apply (for example: xxx.com)  
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see “Special Characters“ on page 95). The @ character is  
acceptable only as the lead-in to the domain name (such as @extron.com).  
X5! = E-mail account  
X5@ = E-mail address  
X5# = Notify when?  
65 - 72. 65 = e-mail recipient 1, 66 = 2, 67 = 3, ... 72 = recipient #8  
Typical e-mail address format (for example: [email protected])  
0 = no response  
3 = both 1 & 2  
1 = fail/missing 4 = suspend  
2 = fixed/restored  
X5$ = Notification selections  
X5% = Notify status (for read)  
X5^ = DHCP  
00 = both fans, 01 (fan 1), or 02 (fan 2)  
17-digit number. For each digit: 0 = do not notify, 1 = notify  
0 = off, 1 = on  
X5& = Port #  
00 through 99 (00 = all ports)  
X5* = Baud rate  
X5( = Parity  
9600, 19200, 38400, 115200  
odd, even, none, mark, space (only the first letter required)  
X6) = Data bits  
X6! = Stop bits  
7, 8  
1, 2  
X6@ = Port type  
0 = RS-232  
1 = RS-422  
2 = RS-485  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
X6# = Verbose mode  
0 = clear/none (default for Telnet connection)  
1 = verbose mode (default for RS-232/RS-422 connection)  
2 = tagged responses for queries  
3 = verbose mode and tagged for queries  
NOTE: If tagged responses is enabled (modes 2 and 3), all read commands return the constant string and the value as the set command  
does (for example, the read matrix name command ECN}, returns Ipn•X4)]).  
X6$ = Flow control  
X6% = Data pacing (in ms between bytes)  
hardware, software, none (only the first letter required)  
0000 (default) - 1000  
X6^ = Time (in 10 ms increments) to wait for characters  
X6& = Time (in 10 ms increments) to wait between characters  
X6* = Port timeout interval (in 10-sec. increments)  
10 (= 100 ms, default) - 32767  
2 (= 20 ms, default) - 32767  
1 (= 10 seconds) - 65000 (default is 30 = 300 seconds = 5 minutes)  
Command/Response Table for IP-specific SIS Commands  
SIS Command  
(Host to Unit)  
Response  
(Unit to Host)  
Additional description  
Command Function  
IP setup commands  
Set matrix name  
EX4) }  
X4)]  
CN  
Ipn•  
E }  
X4)]  
Read matrix name (location)  
Reset matrix name to factory default  
Set time and date  
CN  
E
}
X4)]  
CN  
Ipn•  
X4@ }  
E CT  
X4@]  
Ipt  
E }  
X4#]  
Read time and date  
CT  
EX4$ }  
X4$]  
Set GMT offset  
In the command, the divider between  
hours and minutes can be either a  
colon or a period. In the response, the  
divider is a colon.  
CZ  
Ipz  
E
}
]
Example:  
8.3 = 8:30  
8.3CZ  
Ipz+08:30  
E }  
X4$]  
X4%]  
X4%]  
Read GMT offset  
CZ  
EX4% }  
Set Daylight Savings Time  
Read Daylight Savings Time  
Set IP address  
CX  
E }  
CX  
EX4^ }  
X4^]  
CI  
Ipi  
E }  
X4^]  
X4&]  
X4*]  
Read IP address  
CI  
E }  
Read hardware address  
Read # of open connections  
Set subnet mask  
Reads MAC address.  
CH  
E }  
CC  
EX4^ }  
X4^]  
CS  
Ips  
E }  
X4^]  
Read subnet mask  
CS  
EX4^ }  
X4^]  
Set gateway IP address  
Read gateway IP address  
Set administrator password  
Read administrator password  
Reset (clear) administrator password  
Set user password  
CG  
Ipg  
E }  
X4^]  
CG  
EX4( }  
X4(]  
CA  
Ipa•  
E }  
X4(]  
CA  
E
}
]
CA  
Ipa•  
EX4( }  
X4(]  
CU  
Ipu•  
E }  
X4(]  
Read user password  
CU  
E
}
]
Reset (clear) user password  
Set mail server, domainname  
CU  
Ipu•  
EX4^ X5) X4( }  
X4^ X5) X4(]  
Ipm , ,  
, , CM  
E }  
Read mail server, domainname  
Set e-mail recipient  
CM  
X4^ X5) X4(]  
, ,  
EX5! X5@ }  
This command sets the recipient. To  
receive e-mail notifications, you must then  
set the events that the switcher reports,  
using one or more separate Set e-mail  
events (EM) commands (see next page).  
, CR  
X5! X5@ ]  
Ipr , ,  
E
}
Example:  
]
X5@ ]  
EX5! }  
CR  
Read e-mail recipient  
,
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command/Response Table for IP Setup SIS Commands (continued)  
SIS Command  
(Host to Unit)  
Response  
(Unit to Host)  
Additional description  
Command Function  
IP setup commands (continued)  
Set e-mail events for recipient  
You must first have set an e-mail  
recipient for the e-mail account number  
E X5! X5$ X5# }  
F, , , EM  
X5! X5$ X5#]  
IpeF, , ,  
X5!  
), using the separate Set e-mail  
recipient (CR) command.  
]
Example:  
E-mail account #72, JSmith, will receive  
fail/missing and fixed/restored messages  
for both fans.  
IpeF*72*0*3  
E
}
F,72,0,2EM  
EX5! X5$ X5# }  
X5$ X5$ X5$  
X5$]  
Read e-mail notifications for one  
account (recipient)  
, , EM  
, , ,... ,  
EX5^ }  
X5^]  
Set DHCP on or off  
DH  
Idh  
E }  
X5^]  
Read DHCP on/off status  
Set serial port parameters  
DH  
EX5& X5* X5( X6) X6! }  
* , , , CP  
X5&  
X5* X5( X6) X6!]  
Cpn Ccp , , ,  
EX5& }  
Read serial port parameters  
CP  
X5* X5( X6) X6!]  
, , ,  
EX5& X6$ X6% ]  
X5&  
X6$ X6%]  
Configure flow control  
Read flow control  
* , CF  
Cpn Cfl ,  
E
X6$ X6%]  
CF  
,
EX5& X6^ X6& ]  
X5&  
X6^ X6&]  
Configure receive timeout  
Read receive timeout  
Set mode  
* , CE  
Cpn Cce ,  
E
X6^ X6&]  
CE  
,
EX5& X6@ }  
X5&  
Cpn Cty  
X6@]  
* CY  
EX5& }  
X6@]  
Read mode  
CY  
EX6# }  
X6#]  
Set verbose mode  
CV  
Vrb  
E }  
X6#]  
Read verbose mode  
CV  
E X6* }  
X6*]  
Configure current port timeout  
Read current port timeout  
Configure global IP port timeout  
Read global IP port timeout  
Clear room preset ties  
0* TC  
Pti0*  
X6*]  
E
}
0TC  
E X6* }  
X6*]  
1* TC  
Pti1*  
X6*]  
E
}
1TC  
E X2% X2#  
]
X2%  
Rmm Spr  
X2#]  
X2#  
X2#  
preset .  
+ * P0*!  
Clear all ties in room  
Special Characters  
The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions. The switcher does not  
accept these characters as part of preset names, name of the switcher, passwords, or locally  
created file names.  
The switcher rejects the following characters:  
{space (spaces are ok for names)} + ~ , @ = ‘ [ ] { } < > ’ “ semicolon (;) colon (:) |  
\ and ?.  
MTPX Plus Series • Programming Guide  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Matrix Software  
This section introduces the software that is included with the MTPX Plus Matrix Switchers  
and details how to use it to optimize the video signal. This section includes:  
Matrix Switchers Control Program  
The Extron Matrix Switchers Control Program provides an easy way to set up ties and sets of  
ties. The program is compatible with Windows 2000, Windows XP, and later. Updates to this  
program can be downloaded from the Extron Web site (www.extron.com).  
The program communicates with the switcher via the following ports:  
Rear panel LAN port — An RJ-45 connection (see “Ethernet Connection” in the  
“Installation” section).  
Rear panel Remote port (MTPX Plus 128) — A 3-pin captive screw connector for  
serial RS-232 control (see “Remote Connection” in the “Installation” section).  
Rear panel Remote port (all other models) — A 9-pin D connector for serial RS-232  
or RS-422 control (see “Remote Connection” in the “Installation” section).  
NOTE: The Remote ports can operate at 9600, 19200, 38400, or 115200 baud  
rates. Models other than the MTPX Plus 128 can support either the RS-232  
or RS-422 serial communication protocol (see “Selecting the Rear Panel  
Remote Port Protocol and Baud Rate” in the “Operation” section to  
configure the Remote port from the front panel).  
Front Panel Configuration port (MTPX Plus 128) — A mini USB B port (see “Front  
Panel Configuration Port” in the “Installation” section).  
Front Panel Configuration port (all other models) — A 2.5 mm mini stereo jack  
for serial RS-232 control (see “Front Panel Configuration Port” in the “Installation”  
section).  
NOTE: The mini jack Configuration port can operate at 9600, 19200, 38400, or  
115200 baud rates (see the Serial port parameters SIS commands on  
page 95 to set the baud rate of this port using an SIS command).  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Installing the Software  
NOTE: For an MTPX Plus 128, you must use version 8.0 or newer of the Matrix  
Switchers Control Program.  
The program is contained on the Extron Software Products DVD. Install the software as follows:  
NOTE: For full functionality, install both of the following programs:  
The Matrix Switchers Control Program  
The Firmware Loader  
1. Insert the DVD into the drive. The Extron software DVD window should appear  
automatically (see figure 47).  
Figure 47. Software DVD Window  
NOTE: If the window does not self-open, run Launch.exe from the DVD.  
2. Click the Softwaretab (see figure 47).  
3. Scroll to the desired program and click Install(see figure 48).  
Figure 48. Software Installation  
4. Follow the on-screen instructions. By default, the installation of the Matrix Switchers  
Control Program creates a C:\Program Files\Extron\ Matrix_Switchers  
directory, and it places the following four icons into a group folder named “Extron  
Electronics\Matrix Switchers:  
MATRIX Switcher + Control Program  
MATRIX Switcher + Help  
Check for Matrix Updates  
Uninstall MATRIX Switcher  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Software Operation via Ethernet  
When an MTPX Plus switcher is connected to an Ethernet WAN or LAN, up to 200 users can  
be connected to operate it, locally or remotely, using the Matrix Switchers Control Program  
(see “Ethernet Connection” in the “Installation” section for installation details).  
Connection to the switcher via the Ethernet is password protected. There are two levels of  
password protection:  
Administrators have full access to all MTPX Plus switching capabilities and editing  
functions.  
Users can select inputs and outputs, set and recall presets, and view all settings with the  
exception of passwords.  
If the same password or no password is required for logging on, all personnel log on with  
administrator privileges. Fields and functions that exceed user privileges are not available in  
the Matrix Switchers Control Program when the operator is logged on as a user.  
Ethernet protocol settings  
The IP Settings/Options screen (see figure 54 on page 103) provides a location for viewing  
and, if connected via a serial port or USB port or if logged on via the LAN port as an  
administrator, editing settings unique to the Ethernet interface (see “IP Settings/Options  
window”, later in this chapter, for more details).  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Matrix Switcher Control Software  
Many items found in the Matrix Switchers Control Program are also accessible via front panel  
controls (see “Front Panel Operations” in the ”Operation” section) and under SIS control  
(see the “Programming Guide” section). The Matrix Switcher+ Help icon opens the Help  
file, which provides information on settings and on how to use the control program itself.  
NOTE: For the MTPX Plus 128, the first time you connect to the Configuration  
(USB) port, the Found New Hardware Wizard appears (see figure 49) (see  
For other connections, proceed to “Starting and using the program” on the  
next page.  
1
2
1
2
Figure 49. Found New Hardware Wizard  
Activating a USB port for the first time  
For the MTPX Plus 128, the first time you connect to the Configuration (USB) port, the  
Found New Hardware Wizard appears (see figure 49). Activate the connected USB port for  
your device as follows:  
NOTE: If you have not installed the latest Matrix Switchers Contol Program (version 8.0  
or newer), click Cancel and install the program. Reconnect the switcher to the  
Configuration port.  
1. Select the No, not this time radio buttonand click Next.  
2. Select the Install the software automaticallyradio button and click Next.  
Follow the on-screen instructions. The wizard assigns the driver necessary to access the  
switcher to the connected Configuration (USB) port (this may take a few minutes).  
3. Click Finishto exit the wizard.  
4. Proceed to “Starting and using the program” on the next page or return to the  
Programming Guide” section.  
NOTE: You may need to repeat these steps if you subsequently connect the  
switcher to a different USB port on the same computer..  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Starting and using the program  
1. To run the Matrix Switchers Control Program, click  
Start> Programs> ExtronElectronics> MatrixSwitchers>  
MATRIXSwitcher+ControlPgm.  
The Comm Port Selection window (figure 50) appears.  
Figure 50. Comm Port Selection Window  
2. Choose either the Comm port that is connected to the rear panel  
Remote port or front panel Config (RS-232) port, IP[LAN], USB, or Emulate.  
If you selected a comm port, check the baud rate displayed in  
the comm port selection window. If you need to change the baud  
rate, click on the Baudbutton and double-click on the desired  
baud rate.  
Available rates are 9600, 19200, 38400, and 115200. The default is 9600.  
NOTE: You may need to repeat these steps if you subsequently connect the  
switcher to a different USB port on the same computer..  
Click OK and proceed to step 4.  
If you selected USB, select the MTPX 128 in the drop-down  
window and click OK. Proceed to step 4.  
If you selected IP [LAN], click OKand proceed to step 3.  
If you selected Emulate, click OKand see “Using Emulation mode” on page 119.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. If you selected IP [LAN]in step 2, the IP Connection window appears (see  
figure 51).  
Figure 51. Address and Password Entry  
a. Examine the Matrix IP Address field in the IP Connection window. The field displays  
the last Matrix IP address entered.  
If the IP address is correct: Proceed to step 3b.  
If the address is not correct: Either click in the Matrix IP Address field and enter  
the IP address or click on the scroll down button ( ) and select from among the  
recently used addresses. Proceed to step 3b.  
NOTE: If the local system administrators have not changed the value, the  
factory-specified default, 192.168.254.254, is the correct value for this  
field.  
b. If the switcher is password protected, click in the Password field and enter the  
appropriate administrator or user password.  
c. Click Connect.  
If you logged on using the administrator password, the Windows program connects  
you to the MTPX Plus switcher with all of the administrator rights and privileges.  
If you logged on using the user password, the Windows program connects you to  
the MTPX Plus switcher with only user capabilities.  
If an incorrect password was entered, the program beeps and returns to the  
password entry display.  
4. The Extron Matrix Switchers Control Program window appears (see figure 52 and  
figure 53 on the next page). The window displays the current configuration of the  
attached matrix. Operate the switcher as desired.  
To make the control program easier to use, assign a device icon to each input and  
output. Click on a box that represents an input or output, and drag the desired icon  
onto the box from the icon palette that appears.  
To set up audio in Follow mode (audio and video have the same tie configuration),  
select the Followbox at the bottom of the window (see figure 52). To set up  
audio in breakaway mode (audio and video have different tie configurations),  
deselect the Followbox (see figure 53).  
To create a tie, drag an input box to one or more output boxes. To remove a tie,  
drag the output box to its tied input box or to the trash can.  
For quick display of information on a specific input or output device, position  
the cursor over that device in the control program window. The program opens  
a window that details the connections to that device, the audio level, and the  
frequency of the video signal input from or output to that device (see the inset box  
in figure 53).  
TIP: You can print a map of the current configuration by clicking File> Print  
Tie Map.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Figure 52. Extron Matrix Switchers Control Program Window  
(no Icons or Ties)  
Figure 53. Sample Program Window (Icons Assigned and Ties Created)  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
IP Settings/Options window  
The IP Settings/Options window (click Tools> IP options, see figure 54) provides a  
location for viewing and, if connected via the either serial port or if you are logged on via  
the LAN port as an administrator, editing settings unique to the Ethernet interface. See the  
Ethernet Link” section on page 146 for basic information about IP addresses. User log-ins  
cannot edit any of the fields on this screen.  
NOTE: Editing variables on the IP Settings/Options screen while connected via the  
LAN port can immediately disconnect the user from the switcher. Extron  
recommends editing the settings on this screen using a serial port and  
protecting the Ethernet access to this screen by assigning an administrator  
password to qualified and knowledgeable personnel only.  
Figure 54. Control Program IP Setting/Options Window  
NOTE: When the control program is connected to the switcher via a serial port, the  
Administrator and User Password fields are not masked. If a password has been  
inadvertently changed to an unknown value, you can look up and, if desired,  
change a password in this window without knowing the current password.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Address and Name fields  
The Matrix IP Addressfield contains the IP address of the connected matrix switcher.  
This value is encoded in the flash memory in the switcher.  
The Gateway IP Addressfield identifies the address of the gateway to the controlling PC  
to be used if the matrix switcher and the mail server are not on the same subnet.  
The Subnet Maskfield is used to determine whether the matrix switcher is on the  
same subnet as the controlling PC when you are subnetting. For more information, see  
Subnetting — A Primer” in the “Ethernet Link” section on page 151.  
The Mail Server IP Addressfield displays the IP address of the mail server that handles  
the e-mail for the facility in which the MTPX Plus switcher is installed.  
Valid addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric subfields, properly called octets,  
separated by dots (periods). Each octet can be numbered from 000 through 255. Leading  
zeroes, up to 3 digits total per field, are optional. Values of 256 and above are invalid.  
The default addresses are as follows, but if these conflict with other equipment at your  
installation, you can change the addresses to any valid value:  
IP address  
Subnet mask 255.255.0.0  
192.168.254.254  
Gateway address 0.0.0.0  
NOTES: The address fields are unavailable when DHCP is selected.  
Editing the addresses while connected via the Ethernet port can immediately  
disconnect the user from the MTPX. Extron recommends editing this  
field using one of the RS-232 ports and protecting the Ethernet access  
by assigning an administrator password to qualified and knowledgeable  
personnel only.  
The Extron Name/Descriptorfield contains the name of the matrix switcher. This  
descriptor can be changed to any valid name, up to 12 alphanumeric characters.  
The Mail Server Domain Namefield displays the domain name that the MTPX Plus  
switcher uses to log on to the e-mail server. Standard domain conventions (such as xxx.com)  
apply.  
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see  
Special Characters“ in the “Programming Guide” section). In the Mail  
ServeDomainNamefield, the @ character is only acceptable as the lead-in to  
the domain name (such as @folklore.net).  
Edit any of these fields as follows:  
1. Click in the desired field. The graphic cursor becomes a text cursor.  
2. Edit the address or name as desired.  
3. Press the <Tab> key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the field.  
4. Click the Takebutton to make the address change take affect.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware Address field  
The hardware address is hardcoded in the MTPX Plus switcher and cannot be changed.  
Use DHCP check box  
The Use DHCP check box directs the MTPX Plus switcher to ignore any entered IP addresses  
and to obtain its IP address from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server (if  
the network is DHCP capable). Contact the local system administrator.  
Date, Time (local), and GMT (offset) fields  
The Datefield displays the current date in the Greenwich Mean Time zone.  
The Time (local)field displays the current time in the local time zone.  
The GMTfield displays the amount of time, in hours and minutes, that the local time varies  
from the GMT international time reference.  
NOTE: Rather than the following procedure, your can click the Sync Time to PC  
button to set the switcher to the internal time of your computer.  
If desired, adjust any of these values as follows:  
1. Click in the desired field. The field changes to an editable field appropriate to the value  
being change and the graphic cursor becomes a text cursor.  
The Datefield becomes a set date field, with the date in  
the format (M)M/(D)D/YYYY. Leading zeroes are not shown.  
The Time (local) field becomes a set time field, with  
the time in the format HH:MM:SS (00:00:00 to 23:59:59).  
The GMT field becomes a set offset field, with the offset in the  
format ±HH:MM (–12:00 to +14:00).  
2. Edit the field as desired to set the proper proper value. For time, remember to use  
24-hour time. Leading zeroes are optional.  
3. Press the <Tab> key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the set date field.  
4. Click the Takebutton to make the date change take affect.  
Sync Time to PC button  
Clicking the Sync Time to PCbutton causes the computer you are operating to send its  
internal time to the switcher in a set time command.  
Use Daylight Savings check box  
Click in the Use Daylight Savingscheck box. When Daylight Saving Time is turned on,  
the switcher automatically updates its internal clock between Standard Time and Daylight  
Saving Time in the spring and fall on the date that the time change occurs in the country  
or region selected. When Daylight Saving Time is turned off, the switcher does not adjust its  
time reference.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-mail Addressee fields  
The eight E-mail Addressee fields permit the administrator to identify the e-mail addresses of  
the personnel to whom the MTPX Plus switcher e-mails notification of its failure and repair  
status. Figure 55 shows a typical e-mail from the switcher.  
Miles Standish  
From: M  
Sent: T  
To:  
uesday, June 10, 2008 10:05 AM  
Miles Standish  
Subject: M  
TPX-FF-FF-09 - Fan Failure  
Tue, 10 Jun 2008 10:05:07  
Unit Name = MTPX-FF-FF-09  
Unit IP Address = 192-168-254-254  
Figure 55. Typical MTPX Plus E-mail  
The radio buttons and check boxes associated with each address field permit the  
administrator to specify specific e-mail requirements for each recipient.  
Edit these fields and controls as follows:  
1. Click in the desired E-mail Addressee field. The graphic cursor becomes a text cursor.  
2. Edit the e-mail address as desired. Standard e-mail address conventions  
(for example: nnnnn@xxx.com) apply.  
3. Press the <Tab> key on the keyboard or click in another field to exit the e-mail addressee  
field.  
4. In the square Fanscheck boxes associated with each addressee, select or deselect the  
fans for status to be e-mailed to the addressee.  
5. In the round radio buttons associated with each addressee, select whether the addressee  
is to be e-mailed of failures, fixes, both, or not be notified.  
The Noneradio button is useful for temporarily removing personnel from the e-mail list  
when they are unavailable, such as on travel or vacation.  
6. If desired, click the Send test E-mailbutton to test the e-mail function.  
7. Click the Takebutton to make the e-mail address changes take affect.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Updating the Firmware  
The firmware upgrade utility provides a way to replace the firmware that is coded on the  
control board of the switcher without taking the switcher out of service.  
NOTE: Upgrading the firmware does not overwrite the current configuration,  
presets, or the audio settings.  
Update the switcher firmware as follows:  
1. Visit the Extron website, www.extron.com, click the Download tab, and then click the  
Firmwarelink (see figure 56).  
1
NOTE: The version, release  
date, and size shown  
are sample values only.  
1
2
3
3
Figure 56. Location of Firmware Upgrade Files  
2. Select the appropriate firmware file (MTPX Firmware) to download and click Download.  
3. Enter the requested personal information and then click Downloadto copy the firmware  
to your computer.  
4. Click Runon the next two screens (see figure 57 on the next page). The PC downloads  
the firmware update from the Extron website and starts the Extron Installation Program  
to extract the firmware file.  
5. Click Next. The program extracts the firmware files and places them in a folder  
identified in the InstallShield Wizard window.  
NOTE: Note the folder to which the firmware file is saved.  
6. Click Finishto exit the program.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE: The version and  
file size shown are  
sample values only.  
4
4
5
Folder where  
firmware is  
installed  
6
Figure 57. Downloading Firmware Upgrade Files  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
7. Connect the computer to either the serial port, USB port, or LAN port of the switcher  
(see the “Installation” section for more details).  
8. Start the Matrix Switchers Control Program and connect to the matrix switcher (see  
Starting and using the software,” on page 100).  
9. Click Tools> Updatefirmware... .  
If the switcher is connected via the LAN port, the select file window appears (see  
figure 58) (see “Ethernet-connected firmware upload”, below).  
If the switcher is connected via an RS-232, RS-422, or USB port, the Extron  
Firmware Loader window appears (see figure 59 on the next page) (see “Serial-port or  
Ethernet-connected firmware upload  
11  
Figure 58. Select File Window  
10. Navigate to the folder where you saved the firmware upgrade file. Select the file.  
CAUTION: The firmware file must have an .s19 extension. Other file types can cause  
the switcher to stop functioning.  
NOTES: When downloaded from the Extron website, the firmware is placed in a  
subfolder of C:\Program Files\Extron\Firmware.  
The original factory-installed firmware is permanently available on the  
matrix switcher. If the attempted firmware upload fails for any reason, the  
switcher reverts to the factory-installed firmware.  
11. Click the Openbutton. The software advises you that you are about to reprogram the  
switcher firmware. Click OKto continue.  
A status window, which shows the progress of the upload,  
appears. The firmware upload to the MTPX Plus switcher may  
take a few minutes.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Serial-port- or USB-port-connected firmware upload  
10  
Figure 59. Extron Firmware Loader Window  
10. Select the MTPX Plus switcher and click File> Open. The Choose Firmware File screen  
appears (see figure 60).  
11  
11  
Figure 60. Choose Firmware File Window  
11. Navigate to and select the new firmware file. Click Open. The Choose Firmware File  
window closes.  
CAUTION: The firmware file must have an .s19 extension. Other file types can cause  
the switcher to stop functioning.  
NOTES: When downloaded from the Extron website, the firmware is placed in a  
subfolder of C:\Program Files\Extron\Firmware.  
The original factory-installed firmware is permanently available on the  
matrix switcher. If the attempted firmware upload fails for any reason, the  
switcher reverts to the factory-installed firmware.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
12. In the Firmware Loader window, click Begin(see figure 61).  
The Total Progress and Progress status bars show the progress of the  
upload. The firmware upload to the switcher may take several minutes.  
Once the status bars have progressed from 0%to 100%, and Status is listed  
as Complete, the firmware loader utility resets the switcher.  
12  
Figure 61. Firmware Loader Screen  
13. Click Exitto close the Firmware Loader.  
NOTE: The firmware loader utility increases the baud rate of the serial port to  
115,200 to speed up the upload process. Occasionally, the firmware loader  
may be unable to return the serial port to its earlier baud rate, in which  
case communications with the switcher may not be possible. If you are no  
longer able to communicate with the switcher after the firmware upload  
Baud Rate” in the “Operation” section.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Uploading HTML Files  
You can create customized HTML pages for the switcher to display. The HTML Files List  
window (see figure 62) provides a way to view the contents of the file system of the switcher  
and to upload custom HTML pages to the switcher.  
Figure 62. HTML Files List Window  
NOTES: The files listed in figure 62 are shown for example only and may not be  
present on your switcher.  
The HTML Files List window is for inserting your custom HTML pages. This is  
not the window to replace the firmware that controls all switcher operation.  
See “Updating firmware,” earlier in this chapter, to replace the firmware.  
The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see  
Special Characters“ in the “Programming Guide” section).  
Upload HTML pages as follows:  
1. Connect the PC to the MTPX Plus switcher via a serial port, the USB port  
(MTPX Plus 128 only), or the LAN port.  
2. Start the Matrix Switchers Control Program and connect to the MTPX Plus switcher (see  
Starting and using the software”, steps 1 through 3, starting on page 100).  
3. Click Tools> HTML File Manager.  
4. Click the Pick File(s) to Load to Serverbutton. An open file window appears.  
5. Navigate to the folder where you saved the HTML file or files. Select the file or files.  
NOTES: To select multiple files, hold the Ctrl key while you select the desired files.  
If you want one of the custom HTML files that you created to be the  
default start-up page, name the file “index.html.” The MTPX Plus  
switcher looks for that file name when you first connect to it using an  
Internet browser.  
6. Click the Openbutton. The file or files upload to the MTPX Plus switcher may take a few  
minutes.  
7. Click the Updatebutton to confirm the upload.  
8. Click the Closebutton to exit the HTML Files List window.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Windows Buttons, Drop Boxes, and Trashcan  
The buttons, drop boxes, and trash can on the right side of the program window perform  
the following functions:  
Power— Unavailable for MTPX Plus Twisted Pair switchers, because the  
switcher power cannot be controlled via software.  
Executive Mode— Allows you to lock out front panel operations, except  
for the view-only mode functions. Click the button to cycle between Lock  
mode 0 (the indicator is white), Lock mode 1 (the indicator displays red),  
and Lock mode 2 (orange).  
in the “Operation” section for definitions of the Lock modes.  
Room menu— Displays a list of up to 10 rooms. You can select a room from  
the list to display it in the window.  
NOTE: A Room is a subset of outputs that are logically related to  
each other, as determined by the operator. The MTPX Plus  
switcher supports up to 10 rooms, each of which can consist  
of from 1 to 16 outputs.  
Presets menu— Displays a list of up to 32 global presets and up to 100  
room presets. You can select a preset from the list to display it in the  
window and either activate it (Go) or delete it (Delete).  
Go— Activates the selected preset as the current configuration.  
Save as ... — Allows the current set of ties to be saved as a preset. Enter the preset  
number when prompted to do so.  
Delete— Allows the current preset to be deleted.  
ChangesTake— Saves any changes made to the displayed configuration.  
ChangesCancel— Abandons any changes made to the displayed configuration.  
Trashcan— Drag and drop from an input or output button to the trash can to unmake all  
ties associated with that input or output.  
Windows menus  
File menu  
Savematrixsettings as... — Saves a complete set of up  
to 32 global and 100 room presets, plus the last active setting  
(preset #0), to a file. Saved settings include audio gain and  
volume settings, MTPX configuration and picture settings,  
assigned icons, and icon captions.  
Restorematrixsettingsfrom... — Loads and activates a  
previously saved setting file.  
Savethis-session’ssettings— Saves the current assigned icons and icon captions.  
Restorelast-session’ssettings— Loads the icons and icon captions that were  
saved during the last session. If you saved the changes from the previous session to disk  
the last time you exited the program, the ties from that session are also loaded.  
Selectprinter— Selects the target printer.  
Printtiemap— Prints the tie set that is displayed on the screen.  
Exit— loses the Matrix Switchers Control Program.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Tools menu  
Assign Device Icons— Displays the complete set of input and  
output device icons. You can drag any of these icons to the input  
and output boxes.  
Edit Device Palette— Allows you to add your own device icon  
graphics.  
Audio-Input-Gainsettings— Displays the Configure Audio  
Options window (see figure 63), which shows the audio gain level  
settings for each input and allows you to change them.  
Figure 63. Configure Audio Options Window  
Audio-OutputVolumesettings— Displays the Mute/Output-Volume Adjust window  
(see figure 64), which displays the audio output level setting for a single input or for all  
inputs and allows you to change it. The level is expressed as a percentage of the input  
audio volume that is applied to the output; 0% is full attenuation (audio is silent), 100%  
is full volume.  
Figure 64. Configure Audio Options Window  
Mute-Outputsettings— Displays the Mute/Output-Volume Adjust window (see  
figure 64), which allows you to mute and unmute the video and audio output for a  
single output or for all outputs.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
MTPX configuration settings— Displays the MTPX Configuration Settings window  
(see figure 65), which allows you to define the content of the audio/RS-232 input,  
enable the RS-232 output inserts, and tailor the output sync.  
Figure 65. MTPX Configuration Settings Window  
MTPX Picture settings— Displays the MTPX Picture Settings window (see figure 66),  
which allows you to set the input picture adjustments (level/peaking and skew) and the  
output picture adjustments (pre-peaking and skew). The Auto-Calibrate Level/Peaking  
button lets you use the MTP signal generator (included with most models, optional for  
the MTPX Plus 128) to automatically set the input level/peaking (see “Optimizing the  
Video” on page 121).  
Figure 66. MTPX Picture Settings Window  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
EDID settings(MTPX Plus 128 only) — Displays the EDID Configuration window (see  
figure 67), which allows you to set each input to a specific EDID value and to save the  
output resolution to the user-configurable EDID slots.  
NOTE: This selection is unavailable for switchers other than the MTPX Plus 128.  
Figure 67. EDID Configuration window  
UpdateFirmware ... — Allows you to replace the firmware that is coded on the control  
board of the switcher without taking the switcher out of service (see “Updating the  
firmware” on page 107).  
IP options— Allows you to set IP options (see “IP Settings/Options window” on  
page 103).  
HTML file manager— Displays a list of HTML files installed on the switcher and allows  
you to upload custom files from a PC connected to the switcher (see “Uploading  
HTML files” on page 112).  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Hardware status— Provides an overall view of the status of the matrix switcher,  
including the power supply voltages, the temperature status, the Remote RS-232/RS-422  
port configuration, and the installed and updated firmware status (see figure 68).  
Fan is operating properly.  
Fan has failed.  
The MTPX Plus fans will  
never display the “Not  
Installed” status.  
Figure 68. Status window  
Name Presets— Allows you to name each of the 16 memory presets.  
NOTE: Preset names are limited to 12 upper- and lower-case alphanumeric  
characters, space, and the _ and / characters. The HTML language  
reserves certain characters for specific functions (see “Special Characters“  
in the “Programming Guide” section).  
Show RS-232 Strings— Displays the ASCII commands that are used by the current  
configuration. You can refer to these for SIS programming.  
I/O Group settings— Displays the inputs/outputs groups window, which allows you to  
assign inputs and outputs to any one of four groups (or no group).  
Initialize— Initializes and clears any or all of the following: ties, presets, audio  
configuration, preset names, icon names, and icons.  
Audio Input Configuration selection  
Displays the Configure Audio Options window (see figure 64 on page 114), which shows  
the audio gain level settings for each input and allows you to change them. The level is  
expressed as the magnitude (number of decibels) and polarity (positive, gain or negative,  
attenuation) of the audio adjustment.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Preferences menu  
Immediate Changes— Causes changes to take effect immediately.  
Hold/Verify Changes— Delays implementation of changes until  
the ChangesTakebutton is clicked.  
Ties as Lines— Displays ties as lines (see figure 69).  
Figure 69. Ties Shown as Lines  
Ties as Crosspoints— Displays ties as a matrix of inputs and  
outputs (see figure 70).  
Figure 70. Ties Shown as Crosspoints  
Video and audio ties are indicated as amber check boxes.  
Video-only ties are indicated as green check boxes.  
Audio-only ties are indicate as red check boxes.  
Ties that will take effect when you click the Take button are indicated by a +in the  
check box.  
Ties that will be broken when you click the Take button are indicated by a in the  
check box.  
Limit ties to same group— Allows you to limit the creation of ties using the program  
to inputs and outputs that are in the same group (similar to front panel operation).  
Icons in I/O Boxes— Erases any numbers in the I/O boxes in either the  
ties-as-lines window or the ties-as-boxes window. You can place icons in the  
boxes.  
Numbers in I/O Boxes— Erases any icons in the I/O boxes in either the ties-  
as-lines window or the ties-as-boxes window, and fills each box with the  
associated input or output number.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Catch FPC/others changes— When checked, sets the switcher to report all  
configuration and setting changes to the serial port or Ethernet connection that turned  
this selection on. These reports allow the Matrix Switchers Control Program to track  
the changes that occur in the configuration and settings of the switcher, whether  
commanded via the front panel, a serial port, the USB port (MTPX Plus 128 only), or the  
Ethernet port.  
Master-Reset selection  
Master reset performs all of the following functions:  
Clears all ties  
Clears all presets  
Clears all audio or RS-232 mutes  
Resets all I/O grouping  
Sets all input audio levels to unity gain (0 dB)  
Sets all output volume levels to 100% (0 dB of attenuation)  
NOTE: Master reset does not reset the Internet protocol (IP) settings.  
Using Emulation Mode  
Emulation mode allows you to set up the software without attaching the switcher to the  
computer. To use Emulation mode, do the following:  
1. Click Start> Programs> Extron Electronics> Matrix Switchers> MATRIX  
Switcher+ControlPgm.  
2. Choose Emulate, and click OK.  
3. Choose an emulation file to open, and click OK. The file DEMO.MTX provides a sample  
of a completed matrix setup. The file NEW.INI provides a blank setup to get you started.  
4. Enter the file name under which you want to save any changes to the file, and click OK.  
5. Select MTPX Seriesas the matrix model, select the correct matrix size, select (green)  
the desired local inputs emulation, and click OK(see figure 71).  
Figure 71. Emulation Mode Configuration  
6. Continue using the program as described in the “Starting and using the program“  
section.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Help System  
For information about program features, you can access the help program in any of the  
following ways:  
From the Extron Electronics program folder or group, double-click the  
MATRIX Switcher Help icon (shown at right).  
From within the Matrix Switcher Control Program, click Help> Contents  
on the menu bar.  
From within the Matrix Switcher Control Program, press the <F1> key.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optimizing the Video  
Each TP input has a level and peaking adjustment. Most MTP transmitters and half of  
the MTPX Plus TP outputs have a pre-peaking feature. TP inputs and outputs have skew  
adjustments. Set these adjustable features as follows for the best image quality:  
NOTES: For all of the settings in this section (with the exception of the Pre-Peak  
switch on the transmitter in step 1), see the MTPX Pictures settings and  
MTPX configuration settings menu items in “Tools menu”, on page 114.  
These settings can also be made using SIS commands (see the  
Programming Guide” section) or the built-in HTML pages (see the “HTML  
Operation” section).  
Unless the TP cables are changed, these adjustments should need to be made  
only once, during installation.  
Before you start optimizing, set all input level and peaking, input and output skew, and  
output pre-peak settings to either zero or off.  
MTP Transmitter Pre-Peak Selection  
For inputs from MTP T 15HD products only — If the cable between the MTP transmitter  
and the MTPX Plus is 300 feet (91.4 m) or longer, turn the Pre-Peak switch on the  
transmitter to on. For shorter cables, turn the switch off.  
MTPX Level/Peaking Setting  
Auto calibration  
The simplest and surest way to set the input level/peaking is to use the MTP signal generator  
(included with most models, optional for the MTPX Plus 128) and the Auto-calibration utility  
within the Matrix Switchers Control Program as follows:  
NOTE: To manually set the input level/peaking, see “Manual calibration.”  
1. Disconnect the power and RJ-45 cables at the MTP transmitter connected to the input  
to be adjusted.  
2. Connect the two cables to the MTP signal generator.  
3. If the input cable between the transmitter and the MTPX Plus is longer than 300 feet  
(91.4 m), place the Pre-Peak switch on the MTP signal generator to on (see figure 72).  
Pre-Peak on (up) (shown)  
Power LED  
Pre-Peak off (down)  
Figure 72. MTP Signal Generator  
NOTE: The MTP signal generator does not work on cable lengths over 400 feet  
(120 m). Set the level/peaking to its maximum value of 255.  
4. In the Matrix Switchers Control Program, click Tools> MTPX Picture settingsto  
open the MTPX Picture Settings window (see figure 66 on page 115).  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. Click the Auto-CalibrateLevel/Peakingbutton.  
After a few moments, the program reports whether or not the calibration succeeded  
and the original and new settings for the input Pre-Peaking adjustment.  
6. Disconnect the power and RJ-45 cables from the MTP signal generator and reconnect  
them to the MTP transmitter.  
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each input.  
Manual calibration  
If you choose not to auto calibrate, or if you want to fine tune the adjustment, you can  
manually set the values as follows:  
1. Connect an oscilloscope (preferred) or a monitor (acceptable) to local output  
(VGA output) 1.  
2. If using an oscilloscope, apply a white field test pattern to the input to be optimized  
via an MTP transmitter.  
If using a monitor, apply a grayscale or color bars test pattern to the input to be  
optimized via an MTP transmitter.  
TIP: The Extron VTG 300 or VTG 400 are recommended to provide the test pattern.  
3. Tie the input to be optimized to output 1.  
4. Observe the oscilloscope or the monitor with a critical eye while you adjust the input  
level/peaking setting to compensate for signal loss between the transmitter and the  
MTPX.  
5. If necessary, repeat steps 1 through 4 for each input.  
MTPX Skew Setting  
The MTPX has skew adjustments on the inputs and the outputs. Both should be set to  
compensate for signal skew across all ties. Adjust input and output skew as follows:  
TIP: The Extron VTG 300 or VTG 400 are recommended to provide the test pattern.  
NOTES: • When the skew adjustment is set to zero, the MTPX Plus cannot shift the  
rightmost video image to the left.  
A 2-nanosecond adjustment is very fine. Up to 10 nanoseconds of delay may  
be necessary before you detect a change in the display.  
Input skew  
1. Connect an oscilloscope (preferred) or a monitor (acceptable) to local output  
(VGA output) 1.  
2. Apply a crosshatch test pattern to the input to be optimized via an MTP transmitter.  
3. Tie the input to be optimized to output 1.  
4. Use the test equipment or examine the displayed video image with a critical eye to  
determine which video signal — red, green, or blue — is most shifted to the left.  
5. Adjust the leftmost video signal to the right until all three colors are properly converged.  
6. If either of the two the remaining colors is left shifted, repeat steps 4 and 5.  
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all other inputs.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output skew  
1. Connect an oscilloscope (preferred) or a monitor (acceptable) to the TP output to be  
adjusted, via an MTP receiver.  
2. Apply a crosshatch test pattern to one the local (VGA) inputs.  
3. Tie the local input receiving the test pattern signal to the output to be optimized.  
4. Use the test equipment or examine the displayed video image with a critical eye to  
determine which video signal — red, green, or blue — is most shifted to the left.  
5. Adjust the leftmost video signal to the right until all three colors are converged.  
6. If either of the two the remaining colors is left shifted, repeat steps 4 and 5.  
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for all other outputs.  
MTPX Plus Pre-Peak Selection  
NOTE: MTPX Pre-Peak is available on the first 25% of the MTPX Plus outputs (for  
example, outputs 1 through 4 for an MTPX Plus 168).  
If the cable between the MTPX Plus and the receiver is longer than 300 feet, turn the Pre-  
Peak feature on the MTPX Plus to on. For shorter cables, turn the feature off.  
MTP Receiver Level/Peaking Setting  
If level/peaking is available on the connected receivers, adjust it as follows:  
1. If using an oscilloscope, apply a white field test pattern to one the local (VGA) inputs  
on the MTPX Plus (see figure 73).  
If using a monitor, apply a Color Bars test pattern to one the local (VGA) inputs on the  
MTPX Plus.  
TIP: The Extron VTG 300 or VTG 400 are recommended to provide the test pattern.  
2. Tie the local input receiving the test pattern signal to the output connected to the MTP  
receiver to be optimized.  
VTG 300  
VIDEO  
RGB/R-Y,Y,B-Y  
S
-
V
I
D
E
O
C
O
M
P
O
S
I
T
E
Local (VGA)  
Input  
MTPX Plus  
LOCANPUTS  
RGB  
LOCAL OUTPUT  
RGB  
CONTROL  
MTP  
RS - 232 OUTPUT INSERT  
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
LOCAL  
Tx  
R
x
Tx  
R
x
Tx  
R
x
Tx  
R
x
Tx  
R
x
Tx  
R
x
Tx  
R
x
Tx  
R
x
RGB  
RGB  
ON  
2
3
1
2
-
3
Oscilloscope  
or display  
RJ  
45  
INPUT SELECT  
INPUTS  
OUTPUTS  
Receiver  
AUDIO  
2
1
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MONO AUDIO  
M
T
P
R
L
1
5
H
D
A
1
2
BUFFERED  
INPUT OUTPUT  
POWER  
12V  
1
2
3
4
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
MAX  
ON  
L
1
2
3
4
5
6
OUTPUT  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
MONO AUDIO OUTPUTS  
1
Figure 73. Connections for Setting the Level and Peaking on the Receiver  
3. Connect an oscilloscope or monitor to the output of the MTP receiver.  
4. Adjust the level/peaking on the receiver in accordance with the applicable MTP product  
manual.  
5. Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each receiver to be optimized.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Button-Label Generator Program  
The Button Label Generator software creates labels that you can place in the translucent  
covers of the input and output selection buttons. You can create labels with names,  
alphanumeric characters, or even color bitmaps for easy and intuitive input and output  
selection (see the “Button Labels“ in the “Reference Information” section for the  
procedure for removing and replacing the translucent covers).  
The Extron Button Label Generator is available on the Extron Web site, www.extron.com,  
under the Download Center tab. Click the Software link (see figure 74), and download and  
install the program on your PC.  
Figure 74. Location of Software on the Website  
NOTE: The Button Label Generator software is also included on the Extron Software  
Products Disk that accompanied the switcher.  
By default, the Windows installation creates a C:\Program Files\Extron\  
ButtonLabelGeneratordirectory and places the Button Label Generator icon into a group  
or folder named “Extron Electronics.”  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Button-Label Generator Software  
1. To run the Button-Label Generator program, click Start> Programs>  
Extron Electronics> Button Label Generator> Button Label Generator.  
The Button-Label Generator window appears (see figure 75).  
Figure 75. Extron Button-Label Generator Window  
2. In the Systems selection box, choose the MatrixSwitchers6464option to match the  
button label size and quantities for your MTPX Plus switcher.  
3. Using normal Windows controls, you can create and print labels that can be placed in  
the label windows on the front panel of the switcher.  
NOTE: For best results, print on transparent or translucent material.  
4. Click the Clear All Buttonsbutton and create new labels as many times as  
necessary to make all of the button labels that you need.  
To access the help program, click the Help menu.  
MTPX Plus Series • Matrix Software 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HTML Operation  
This section introduces using the built-in HTML pages to operate the MTPX Plus Matrix  
Switchers, including:  
The switcher can be controlled and operated through its LAN port, connected via a LAN  
or WAN, using a web browser such as the Microsoft Internet Explorer. The display in the  
browser of the status or operation of the switcher has the appearance of web pages. This  
chapter describes the factory-installed HTML pages, which are always available and cannot  
be erased or overwritten.  
NOTE: If your Ethernet connection to the matrix switcher is unstable, try turning off  
the proxy server in your Web browser. In Microsoft Internet Explorer, click  
Tools> Internet Options> Connections> LAN Settings, uncheck the  
Use a proxy server... box, and then click OK.  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download the Startup Page  
Access the switcher using HTML pages as follows:  
1. Start the Web browser program.  
2. Click in the Addressfield of the browser.  
3. Enter the Matrix IP address in the Addressfield of the browser.  
NOTE: If the local system administrators have not changed the value, the factory-  
specified default, 192.168.254.254, is the correct value for this field.  
4. If you want the browser to display a page other than the default page (such as a custom  
page that you have uploaded), enter a slash (/) and the file name to open.  
NOTES: The Addressfield of the browser should display the address in the  
following format: <xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx>/<optional_file_name>.html.  
The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see  
Special Characters“ in the “Programming Guide” section).  
5. Press the keyboard <Enter> key. The switcher checks to see if it is password protected.  
If the switcher is not password protected, it checks and downloads the HTML pages  
(proceed to step 7).  
If the switcher is password protected, the switcher downloads the Enter Network  
Password page (see figure 76).  
Figure 76. Enter Network Password Page  
NOTE: A User name entry is not required.  
6. Click in the Passwordfield and type in the appropriate administrator or user password.  
Click the OKbutton.  
7. The switcher checks several possibilities, in the following order, and then responds  
accordingly:  
Does the address include a specific file name, such as  
10.13.156.10/<file_name>.html?  
If so, the switcher downloads that HTML page.  
Is there a file in the switcher memory that is named “index.html”?  
If so, the switcher downloads “index.html” as the default startup page.  
If neither of the above conditions is true, the switcher downloads the factory-  
installed default startup page, “nortxe_index.html” (see figure 77 on the next  
page), also known as the System Status page.  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Status Tab  
System Status Page  
The System Status page (see figure 77) provides an overall view of the status of the matrix  
switcher, including individual voltages, and the serial port status. The System Status page is  
the default page that the switcher downloads when you connect to the switcher. Access the  
System Status page from other pages by clicking the Status tab.  
Refresh  
Figure 77. System Status Page  
The status web page periodically updates itself to reflect the latest status of the switcher  
components. If a value changes, the display shows the change in status the next time it  
updates.  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuration Tab  
System Settings Page  
The MTPX Plus switcher downloads the System Settings page (see figure 78) when you click  
the Configurationtab. The screen consists of fields in which you can view and edit IP  
administration and system settings. You can access the Email Settings and Passwords pages  
by clicking the appropriate link. See “Ethernet Link” on page 146 for basic information  
about IP addresses and subnetting.  
Refresh  
Select Passwords  
Select Email Settings  
Select Firmware Upgrade  
Figure 78. System Settings Page  
On password-protected connections, there are two levels of protection: administrator and  
user. Administrators have full access to all switching capabilities and editing functions. Users  
can create ties, create and recall presets, set audio or RS-232 mutes, and view all settings  
with the exception of passwords.  
IP Settings fields  
The IP Settings fields provide a location for viewing and editing settings unique to the  
Ethernet interface. After editing any of the settings on this page, click the Submitbutton at  
the bottom of the page.  
Unit Name field  
The Unit Name field contains the name used as the “from” information when the switcher  
e-mails notification of its failed or repaired status. This name field can be changed to any  
valid name, up to 24 alphanumeric characters.  
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see  
Special Characters“ in the “Programming Guide” section).  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DHCP radio buttons  
The DHCP Onradio button directs the switcher to ignore any entered IP addresses and  
to obtain its IP address from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server (if the  
network is DHCP capable). The DHCP Offradio button turns DHCP off. Contact the local  
system administrator to determine if DHCP is appropriate.  
IP Address field  
The IP Addressfield contains the IP address of the connected switcher. This value is  
encoded in the flash memory of the switcher.  
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric octets separated by dots (periods).  
Each field can be numbered from 000 through 255. Leading zeroes, up to 3 digits total per  
field, are optional. Values of 256 and above are invalid.  
The factory-installed default address is 192.168.254.254, but if this conflicts with other  
equipment at your installation, you should ask your network administrator for a new, valid  
address.  
NOTE: IP address changes can cause conflicts with other equipment. Only local system  
administrators should change IP addresses.  
Gateway IP Address field  
The Gateway IP Addressfield identifies the address of the gateway to the mail server to  
be used if the switcher and the mail server are not on the same subnet.  
The gateway IP address has the same validity rules as the system IP address.  
Subnet Mask field  
The Subnet Maskfield is used to determine whether the switcher is on the same subnet  
as the mail server when you are subnetting. For more information, see “Subnetting — A  
Primer”.  
MAC Address field  
The Media Access Control (MAC) Address is hardcoded in the switcher and cannot be  
changed.  
Firmware field  
The Firmwarefield identifies the installed firmware version. This field is hardcoded in the  
switcher and cannot be changed.  
Model field  
The Modelfield identifies the number of video and audio inputs and outputs. This field is  
hardcoded in the switcher and cannot be changed.  
Part Number field  
The Part Numberfield identifies the part number of your switcher. This field is hardcoded  
in the switcher and cannot be changed.  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Date/Time Settings fields  
The Date/Time Settings fields (see figure 79) provide a location for viewing and setting the  
time functions.  
Figure 79. Date/Time Settings Fields  
Change the date and time settings as follows:  
1. Click the drop box for the desired value. The adjustable variables are month, day, year,  
hours, minutes, AM/PM, and (time) zone. A drop-down scroll box appears (the year drop  
box is selected in figure 79).  
2. Click and drag the slider or click the scroll up button or the scroll down button  
until the desired value is visible.  
3. Click the desired value.  
NOTES: If setting the time, set the local time. The Zone variable allows you to  
then enter the offset from Greenwich Mean Time (GMT).  
The Zone field identifies the standard time zone selected and displays the  
amount of time, in hours and minutes, that the local time varies from the  
GMT international time reference.  
4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 for other variables that need to be changed.  
5. If appropriate, select the appropriate Daylight Savings radio button to turn on the  
daylight savings time feature for your region or nation.  
NOTE: When Daylight Savings Time is turned on, the switcher automatically  
updates its internal clock between Standard Time and Daylight Savings  
Time in the spring and fall on the date that the time change occurs in the  
country or region selected. When Daylight Savings Time is turned off, the  
switcher does not adjust its time reference.  
6. Click the Submit button.  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Passwords Page  
Access the Passwords page (see figure 80) by clicking the Passwordslink on the System  
Settings page.  
Refresh  
Select Passwords  
Select Email Settings  
Select Firmware Upgrade  
Figure 80. Passwords Page  
NOTE: If the switcher is password protected, fields on this page can be edited only by  
people logged in as administrators.  
The fields on the Passwords page are for entering and verifying administrator and  
user passwords. Passwords are case sensitive and are limited to up to 12 upper-  
case and lower-case alphanumeric characters. Each password must be entered  
twice; once in the Password field and then again in the Re-enter Password field.  
Characters in these fields are masked by asterisks (*****). If you do not want to password  
protect an access level, leave the Password field and the Re-Enter Password field blank. After  
entering the password in both fields, click the Submit button.  
NOTE: An administrator password must be created before a user password can be  
created.  
Resetting a password  
Reset an existing password so that no password is required as follows:  
1. Clear any existing password.  
2. Enter a single space character in the Passwordand Re-enterPasswordfields.  
3. Click the Submitbutton.  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Email Settings Page  
Reach the Email Settings page (see figure 81) by clicking the EmailSettingslink on  
the System Settings page. The Email Settings page has fields for setting up the e-mail  
notification capabilities of the switcher. For the e-mail settings and for each row of the  
e-mail notification settings, click the Editbutton to make the fields available for editing.  
The button changes to Save. After editing the settings associated with the Edit/Save  
button, click the Savebutton.  
Refresh  
Select Passwords  
Select Email Settings  
Select Firmware Upgrade  
Figure 81. Email Settings Page  
Mail IP Address field  
The Mail IP Address field displays the IP address and the domain name of the mail server that  
handles the e-mail for the facility in which the switcher is installed.  
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric octets separated by dots (periods).  
Each field can be numbered from 000 through 255. Leading zeroes, up to three digits total  
per field, are optional. Values of 256 and above are invalid.  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting up SMTP authorization  
If desired, set the MTPX Plus to require SMTP authorization before accepting any e-mail as  
follows:  
1. Click Edit. The button changes to Save.  
2. Check the SMTPAuthorizationRequiredcheck box, located below the Domain  
Namefield. This enables the UserNameand Passwordfields below the check box.  
3. Enter a user name and a password in the UserNameand Passwordfields. For the  
MTPX Plus to accept their e-mail messages, senders must enter the user name and  
password.  
NOTES: For the User name, any combination of letters, numerals, spaces, and  
symbols except the comma (,) and the single and double quotation marks  
(‘ and “) are valid. For the password, all characters except the comma are  
valid. The user name and password can each be from 1 to 30 characters.  
Both a user name and a password must be specified.  
4. Click Save to save the user name and password.  
Deselecting SMTP authorization  
Remove SMTP authorization as follows:  
1. Click Edit. The button changes to Save.  
2. Click (deselect) the SMTPAuthorizationRequiredcheck box.  
3. Click Save.  
Domain Name field  
The Domain Name field displays the domain name that the MTPX Plus switcher uses to log  
on to the e-mail server. Standard domain name conventions (for example: xxx.com) apply.  
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see  
Special Characters“ in the “Programming Guide” section). The @ character is  
acceptable only as the lead-in to the domain name (such as @folklore.net).  
Email Address fields  
The eight Email Addressfields identify the e-mail addresses of the personnel to whom  
the MTPX Plus switcher e-mails notification of its failure and repair status. Standard e-mail  
address conventions (nnnnn@xxx.com) apply.  
The Fanscheck boxes and drop boxes associated with each address field permit the  
operator to specify specific criteria under which the switcher will e-mail recipients. Check  
the Fansboxes to monitor the cooling. In the associated EMail Optionsdrop box, select  
whether the recipient is to be e-mailed of failures, fixes, both, not notified, or to be removed  
from the e-mail list. The Suspendoption is useful for temporarily removing personnel from  
the e-mail list when they are unavailable, such as on travel or vacation. Deleting an e-mail  
addressee and clicking the Savebutton removes the recipient from e-mail notification  
completely.  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Firmware Upgrade Page  
The Firmware Upgrade page provides another way to replace the firmware that is coded  
on the control board of the switcher without taking the switcher out of service.. Access  
the Firmware Upgrade page (see figure 82) by clicking the Firmware Upgradelink on the  
System Settings page.  
Refresh  
Select Passwords  
Select Email Settings  
Select Firmware Upgrade  
Figure 82. Firmware Upgrade Page  
Update the switcher firmware as follows:  
NOTE: The Firmware Upgrade page is only for replacing the firmware that controls  
all switcher operation. To insert your own custom HTML pages, see “File  
Management Page”, on page 136.  
1. Get the firmware (see “Updating the Firmware” in the “Matrix Software” section,  
steps 1 through 6 and then return to this section).  
2. Connect the PC to the MTPX Plus switcher via the LAN port of the switcher.  
3. Access the MTPX Plus switcher using HTML pages.  
4. Click the Configurationtab.  
5. Click the Firmware Upgradelink.  
6. Click the Browsebutton. An open file window appears.  
7. Navigate to the folder where you saved the firmware upgrade file and select it.  
CAUTION: The firmware file must have an .s19 extension. Other file types can cause  
the switcher to stop functioning.  
NOTES: When downloaded from the Extron website, the firmware is placed in a  
subfolder of C:\Program Files\Extron\Firmware.  
The original factory-installed firmware is permanently available on the  
matrix switcher. If the attempted firmware upload fails for any reason, the  
switcher reverts to the factory-installed firmware.  
8. Click the Openbutton.  
9. Click the Uploadbutton. The firmware upload to the MTPX Plus switcher may take a  
few minutes.  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
File Management Tab  
File Management Page  
To delete files such as user-supplied HTML pages from the switcher or to upload your own  
files to the switcher, click the File Managementtab. The switcher downloads the file  
management HTML page (see figure 83).  
Figure 83. File Management Page  
NOTE: The files listed in figure 83 are shown for example only and may not be present  
on your switcher.  
To delete a file, check the associated delete check box and click the Delete Files button.  
Upload your own files as follows:  
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see  
Special Characters“ in the “Programming Guide” section).  
1. Click the Browsebutton.  
2. Browse through your system and select the desired file of files.  
NOTE: If you want one of the pages that you create and upload to be the default  
startup page, name that file “index.html”.  
3. Click the Upload Filebutton. The file(s) that you selected appear in the list.  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Control Tab  
User Control page  
You can create ties on the User Control page (see figure 84). Access the User Control page  
by clicking the Controltab.  
Refresh  
Picture Settings  
MTPX Configuration  
I/O Settings  
Global Presets  
Figure 84. User Control Ties page  
The page consists of a matrix of input (rows) and output (columns) selection buttons of four  
different colors:  
The amber buttons indicate video and audio ties.  
The green buttons indicate video only ties.  
The red buttons indicate audio only ties.  
The gray buttons indicate no ties.  
NOTE: If you lose track of the input and output associated with a specific button, let  
the mouse pointer rest over a button for a moment. As shown in figure 84, a  
field pops up that identifies the input and output for that button.  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating a tie  
Select and switch an input as follows:  
1. Click the Video Only, Audio Only, or Video & Audiobutton to select video, audio,  
or both for switching (audio follow or audio breakaway). Each mouse click on a button  
toggles the other two buttons off.  
2. Move the mouse over the matrix of input and output selection buttons. Click a button  
to create a pending tie (if a tie does not exist) or pending untie (if a tie exists) of the  
input and output associated with that button. A “P” (for pending) appears in the  
button.  
NOTES: If you lose track of the input and output associated with a specific  
button, let the mouse rest over one of the tie buttons for a moment. A  
field pops up (as shown on figure 84) that identifies the input and output  
for that button.  
To tie an input to all outputs, click that input number.  
3. Click the Takebutton to make the configuration changes or the Cancelbutton to  
abandon the configuration changes.  
Picture Settings Page  
The Picture Settings page provides a way to set the input level/peaking, the output pre-  
peaking, and the input and output skew settings. Access the Picture Settings page (see  
figure 85) by clicking the PictureSettingslink on the Control page.  
Set and View Ties  
Refresh  
MTPX Configuration  
I/O Settings  
Global Presets  
Figure 85. Picture Settings Page  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Changing the input level/peaking  
Users can set the level/peaking value (from 000 through 255) for each input from the Picture  
Settings page. Level/peaking can be adjusted to compensate for longer cable runs on the  
inputs. Change the level/peaking setting for an input in any of the following three ways:  
Use the auto calibration function as follows:  
1. Disconnect the power and RJ-45 cables at the MTP transmitter connected to input  
to be calibrated.  
2. Connect the two cables to the MTP signal generator (included with most models,  
optional for the MTPX Plus 128).  
3. If the input cable is longer than 300 feet (91.4 m), place the Pre-Peak switch on the  
MTP signal generator to on (up when the RJ-45 connector on the signal generator is  
to the right [see figure 86]). If the cable is shorter than 300 feet (91.4 m), place the  
switch down.  
Pre-Peak on (up) (shown)  
Power LED  
Pre-Peak off (down)  
Figure 86. MTP signal generator  
NOTE: The MTP signal generator does not work on cable lengths over  
400 feet (120 m). Set the level/peaking to its maximum value of 255.  
4. Click the Autobutton.  
Click the Level/Peaking up button or down button for the  
desired input.  
Directly enter a value into the Level/Peaking field.  
HINT:  
Watch a display as you make adjustments.  
Toggling output pre-peaking on and off  
Users can toggle the pre-peaking value for each output on and off from  
the Picture Settings page. Click in the Pre-Peakingcheck box for the  
desire output to toggle the pre-peaking feature on and off for that output.  
Pre-peak alters the TP signal output to correct for long cable runs (see  
table 1 on page 5 for recommended maximum transmission lengths).  
Changing the skew  
Users can individually set the red, green, and blue skew setting for each input and output  
from the Picture Settings page. The skew settings correct skew delay (misconvergence) problems  
commonly encountered when using Category (CAT) 5, 5e, or 6 twisted pair (TP) cables for RGB or  
component video transmission.  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Change skew setting for an input or output as follows:  
NOTE: For best results, set all three skew values to 0 ns (see steps 2a and 2b below)  
before adjusting for misconvergence.  
1. Use UTP cable test equipment or examine the displayed video image with a critical eye  
to determine which video signal, red, green, or blue, is most shifted to the left.  
NOTE: A crosshatch test pattern is ideal for evaluating pair skew.  
2. Monitor the displayed image. Increase the skew setting for the left-shifted video signal 2  
ns at a time as follows:  
NOTE: The skew compensation function cannot shift a video plane farther left  
than the 0 ns setting.  
a. Click drop box for the desired input or output and the desired  
video plane. A drop-down scroll box appears.  
NOTE: The red video plane is selected at right.  
b. Click and drag the slider or click on the scroll up button or the  
scroll down button until the desired value is visible.  
NOTES: A 2-nanosecond adjustment is very fine. Up to  
10 nanoseconds of delay may be necessary before you  
detect a change in the display.  
As an alternative to step 2, or to watch a display as  
you make adjustments, click on the up button or  
down button.  
3. If either of the other video signals is misconverged, repeat steps 2a and  
2b.  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MTPX Configuration Page  
The MTPX Configuration page provides a way to define the content of the audio/RS-232  
input, enable the RS-232 output inserts, and tailor the output sync. Access the MTPX  
Configuration page (see figure 87) by clicking the MTPX Configurationlink on the  
Control page.  
Set and View Ties  
Picture Settings  
Refresh  
I/O Settings  
Global Presets  
Figure 87. MTPX Configuration Page  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
I/O Settings Page  
The I/O Settings page provides a way to set the input audio gain and attenuation and the  
output volume. Access the I/O Settings page (see figure 88) by clicking the I/O Settings  
link on the Control page.  
Set and View Ties  
Picture Settings  
MTPX Configuration  
Refresh  
Global Presets  
Figure 88. I/O Settings Page  
Changing the input gain and attenuation  
Users can set the level of audio gain or attenuation (-18 dB to  
+24 dB) of each input from the I/O Settings page. Audio levels  
can be adjusted so there are no noticeable volume differences  
between sources.  
Change the gain and attenuation setting for an input as  
follows:  
1. Click the Input Audio Level drop box for the desired input.  
A drop-down scroll box appears.  
2. Click and drag the slider or click on the scroll up button  
or the scroll down button until the desired value is  
visible.  
NOTE: As an alternative to steps 1 and 2, or to listen  
to the audio as you make adjustments, click on  
the up button or down button.  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Changing the output volume level  
Users can set the volume level for each local audio output volume  
level from the I/O Settings page. Volume is adjustable through a range  
of zero steps of attenuation (full attenuation, minimum volume) to  
64 steps of attenuation (no attenuation, full volume).  
Change the audio volume setting for an output as follows:  
1. Click the Volumedrop box for the desired output. A drop-down  
scroll box appears.  
2. Click and drag the slider or click on the scroll up button or the  
scroll down button until the desired value is visible.  
NOTES: As an alternative to steps 1 and 2, or to listen to  
the audio as you make adjustments, click on the up  
button or down button.  
Table 8, on the on the next page, defines the value  
of each audio volume step.  
Muting and unmuting an audio or RS-232 output  
Mute and unmute an audio or RS-232 output by clicking the  
associated Audio Mute button. Each click toggles the mute status.  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Table 8. Audio volume adjustment settings  
dB of  
Output  
dB of  
Output  
dB of  
Output  
Number  
of steps  
Number  
of steps  
Number  
of steps  
attenuation volume  
attenuation volume  
attenuation volume  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
76  
63  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
57  
56  
55  
54  
53  
52  
51  
50  
49  
48  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
0%  
5.5%  
7%  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
41  
40  
39  
38  
37  
36  
35  
34  
33  
32  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
38.5%  
40%  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
71.5%  
73%  
8.5%  
10%  
41.5%  
43%  
74.5%  
76%  
11.5%  
13%  
44.5%  
46%  
77.5%  
79%  
14.5%  
16%  
47.5%  
49%  
80.5%  
82%  
17.5%  
19%  
50.5%  
52%  
83.5%  
85%  
20.5%  
22%  
53.5%  
55%  
86.5%  
88%  
8
23.5%  
25%  
56.5%  
58%  
7
89.5%  
91%  
6
26.5%  
28%  
59.5%  
61%  
5
92.5%  
94%  
4
29.5%  
31%  
62.5%  
64%  
3
95.5%  
97%  
2
32.5%  
34%  
65.5%  
67%  
1
98.5%  
100%  
0
35.5%  
37%  
68.5%  
70%  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Global Presets Page  
You can save and recall global presets from the Global presets page (see figure 89). Access  
the Global presets page by clicking the GlobalPresetslink on the left of the Control  
page.  
Set and View Ties  
Picture Settings  
MTPX Configuration  
I/O Settings  
Refresh  
Figure 89. Global Presets Page  
Saving a preset  
Save the current configuration (configuration 0) as a preset as follows:  
1. Click the Save Presetbutton.  
2. Select the desired preset by clicking on one of the presets listed. To create a new preset,  
click one of the [unassigned]buttons. Overwrite an existing preset by clicking an  
already existing preset.  
3. If desired, type over the current name in the box adjacent to the Save Presetbutton.  
NOTE: The HTML language reserves certain characters for specific functions (see  
Special Characters“ in the “Programming Guide” section).  
If you do not rename an unassigned button, the MTPX Plus switcher names the preset as  
Preset {next available number}.  
If you do not rename an existing preset when it is overwritten, the MTPX Plus switcher  
retains the same name.  
4. Click the Acceptbutton.  
Recalling a preset  
To recall a global preset as the current configuration, click the button associated with the  
desired preset.  
MTPX Plus Series • HTML Operation 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Ethernet  
Connection  
This section provides a high level discussion of the Ethernet connection to the switcher and a  
primer on the subject of subnetting. Topics that are covered, include:  
Ethernet Link  
The rear panel Ethernet connector on the MTPX Plus switcher can be connected to an  
Ethernet LAN or WAN. This connection makes SIS control of the switcher possible using a  
computer connected to the same LAN.  
Ethernet Connection  
The Ethernet cable can be terminated as a straight-through cable or a crossover cable and  
must be properly terminated for your application (see figure 90).  
Crossover cable — Direct connection between the computer and the  
MTPX Plus switcher  
Patch (straight-through) cable — Connection of the MTPX Plus switcher to an  
Ethernet LAN  
Crossover Cable  
End 1  
Straight-through Cable  
Pins:  
12345678  
End 2  
Wire color  
End 1  
End 2  
Wire color  
Pin  
Wire color  
Pin  
Wire color  
1
White-green  
White-orange  
1
White-orange  
White-orange  
2
3
4
5
Green  
Orange  
2
3
4
5
Orange  
Orange  
White-orange  
Blue  
White-green  
Blue  
White-green  
Blue  
White-green  
Blue  
White-blue  
White-blue  
White-blue  
White-blue  
6
7
8
Orange  
Green  
6
7
8
Green  
Green  
White-brown  
Brown  
White-brown  
Brown  
White-brown  
Brown  
White-brown  
Brown  
Insert Twisted  
Pair Wires  
T568A  
T568B  
T568B  
T568B  
A cable that is wired as T568A at one end  
and T568B at the other (Tx and Rx pairs  
reversed) is a "crossover" cable.  
A cable that is wired the same at both ends is  
called a "straight-through" cable, because  
no pin/pair assignments are swapped.  
RJ-45  
Connector  
Figure 90. RJ-45 Connector Pinout Tables  
Default IP Address  
To access the MTPX Plus switcher via the LAN port, you need the IP address of the switcher.  
If the address has been changed to an address comprised of words and characters, you can  
determine the actual numeric IP address using the ping utility. If the address has not been  
changed, the factory-specified default is 192.168.254.254.  
Ping can also be used to test the Ethernet link to the MTPX Plus switcher.  
MTPX Plus Series • Ethernet Connection 146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Pinging to Determine the Extron IP Address  
The ping utility is available at the Command prompt. Ping tests the Ethernet interface  
between the computer and the MTPX Plus switcher. Ping can also be used to determine the  
actual numeric IP address from an alias and to determine the web address.  
Ping the switcher as follows:  
1. On the Windows task bar, click on Start> Run.  
2. At the Openprompt, type command.  
3. Click the OKbutton.  
4. At the Command prompt, type ping {IP address}and then press <Enter>. The  
computer returns a display similar to the one shown in figure 91.  
C:\>ping 192.168.254.254  
Pinging 192.168.254.254 with 32 bytes of data:  
Reply from 192.168.254.254: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128  
Reply from 192.168.254.254: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128  
Reply from 192.168.254.254: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128  
Reply from 192.168.254.254: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128  
Ping statistics for 192.168.254.254:  
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),  
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:  
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms  
Figure 91. Typical Ping Response  
The line Pinging ...reports the actual numeric IP address, regardless of whether you  
entered the actual numeric IP address or an alias name.  
Pinging to Determine the Web IP Address  
The ping utility has a modifier, -a, that directs the command to return the web address  
rather than the numeric IP address.  
At the Command prompt, type ping -a {IP address}and then press <Enter>. The return  
display is similar to the ping response shown in figure 91, except that when you specify the  
-amodifier, the line Pinging mail...reports the web IP address rather than the numeric  
IP address, regardless of whether you entered the actual numeric IP address or an alias  
name.  
Configuring the MTPX Plus switcher for Network Use via the ARP Command  
The ARP (address resolution protocol) command tells your computer to associate the MAC  
(media access control) address of the MTPX Plus switcher with the assigned IP address. You  
must then use the ping utility to access the controller, at which point the IP address of the  
controller is reconfigured.  
Use ARP to configure the IP address as follows:  
1. Obtain a valid IP address for the MTPX Plus switcher from your network administrator.  
2. Obtain the MAC address (UID #) of the MTPX Plus switcher from the label on its rear  
panel. The MAC address should have this format: 00-05-A6-xx-xx-xx.  
3. If the MTPX Plus switcher has never been configured and is still set for factory defaults,  
proceed to step 4. If not, perform a mode 4 system reset and then proceed to step 4.  
For detailed information on reset modes, see “Performing Soft System Resets  
MTPX Plus Series • Ethernet Connection 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NOTE: The MTPX Plus switcher must be configured with the factory default IP  
address (192.168.254.254) before the ARP command is executed, as  
described below.  
4. At the PC, access the Command prompt (see “Pinging to Determine the Extron IP  
Address” on the preceding page, steps 1 through 3), then enter the arp –scommand.  
Type in the desired new IP address for the unit (obtained in step 1) and the MAC address  
of the unit (from the rear panel of the unit), for example  
arp –s 10.13.197.7 00-05-A6-03-69-B0and then press {Enter}.  
The computer returns the command prompt (C:\).  
After you issue the arp -scommand, the controller changes to the new address and  
starts responding to the ping requests to the new address, as described in the next step.  
NOTE: You must ping the MTPX Plus switcher for the IP address change to take  
place. The response should show the new IP address, as shown in figure 92.  
5. Execute a ping command by entering ping followed by a space and the new IP address  
at the command prompt. For example:  
ping 10.13.197.7  
C:\>ping 10.13.197.7  
Pinging 10.13.197.7 with 32 bytes of data:  
Reply from 10.13.197.7: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128  
Reply from 10.13.197.7: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128  
Reply from 10.13.197.7: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128  
Reply from 10.13.197.7: bytes=32 time<10ms TTL=128  
Ping statistics for 10.13.197.7:  
Packets: Sent = 4, Received = 4, Lost = 0 (0% loss),  
Approximate round trip times in milli-seconds:  
Minimum = 0ms, Maximum = 0ms, Average = 0ms  
Figure 92. Ping with New Address  
NOTE: You can reconnect using either Telnet or a web browser to verify that the  
update was successful.  
6. After verifying that the IP address change was successful, enter and issue the arp –d  
command at the Command prompt. For example:  
arp –d 10.13.197.7removes 10.13.197.7 from the ARP table  
or  
arp –d*removes all static IP addresses from the ARP table.  
MTPX Plus Series • Ethernet Connection 148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting as a Telnet Client  
The Microsoft Telnet utility is available from the Command prompt. Telnet allows you to  
input SIS commands to the MTPX Plus switcher from the PC via the Ethernet link and the  
LAN.  
Access the Command prompt and start Telnet as follows:  
1. On the Windows task bar, click Start> Run.  
2. At the Openprompt, type command.  
3. Click the OKbutton.  
4. At the Command prompt, type Telnetand then press <Enter>. The computer returns a  
display similar to the one shown in figure 93.  
Microsoft (R) windows 2000 (TM) Version 5.0 (Build 2195)  
Welcome to Microsoft Telnet Client  
Telnet Client Build 5.00.99203.1  
Escape Character is 'CTRL+]'  
Microsoft Telnet>  
Figure 93. Telnet Window  
Telnet Tips  
It is not the intention of this guide to detail all of the operations and functionality of Telnet;  
however, some basic level of understanding is necessary for operating the MTPX Plus  
switcher via Telnet.  
Open  
Connect to the MTPX Plus switcher using the Open command. Once you are connected to  
the switcher, you can enter the SIS commands the same as you would if you were using the  
RS-232 of RS-422 link.  
Connect to the MTPX Plus switcher as follows:  
1. At the Telnet prompt, type open {IP address}and then press <Enter>.  
If the switcher is not password protected, no further prompts are displayed until  
you break or disconnect the connection to the matrix switcher.  
If the switcher is password protected, Telnet displays the password prompt.  
2. If necessary, at the password prompt, type the appropriate password and then press  
<Enter>.  
Connection to the switcher via the Ethernet can be password protected. There are  
two levels of password protection: administrator and user. A person logged on as an  
administrator has full access to all matrix switcher switching capabilities and editing  
functions. Users can create ties, set mutes, and view all settings with the exception of  
passwords. By default, the MTPX Plus switcher is shipped with both passwords set to  
{carriage return}.  
Once you are logged in, the switcher returns either Login Administratoror Login  
User. No further prompts are displayed until you break or disconnect the connection to  
the MTPX Plus switcher.  
MTPX Plus Series • Ethernet Connection 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Escape character and Esc key  
When Telnet is first started, the utility advises that the Escape character is ‘Ctrl+]’. Many  
SIS commands include the keyboard <Esc>key. Consequently, some confusion may exist  
between the Escape character and the Escape key.  
The Telnet Escape character is a key combination, the <Ctrl>key and the <]>key pressed  
simultaneously, which returns you to the Telnet prompt while leaving the connection to the  
MTPX Plus switcher intact.  
The Escape key is the <Esc>key on the computer keyboard.  
Local echo  
Once connected to the MTPX Plus switcher, by default, Telnet does not display your  
keystrokes on the screen. SIS commands are typed in blindly and only the SIS responses are  
displayed on the screen. To command Telnet to show keystrokes, at the Telnet prompt, type  
set local_echoand then press <Enter> before you open the connection to the switcher.  
With local echo turned on, keystrokes and the responses of the switcher are displayed on  
the same line. For example: 1*1!In1 Out1 All, where 1*1!is the SIS command and In1  
Out1 Allis the response.  
With local echo turned on, all keystrokes are displayed, even those that should be masked,  
such as the password entry. For example, when entering a password with local echo turned  
on, you see a display such as a*d*m*i*n*, where adminis the keyed in password and  
*****is the masked response.  
You can turn off local echo by typing unset local_echoand then pressing <Enter> at the  
Telnet prompt. If you are connected to the MTPX Plus switcher and need to access the Telnet  
prompt to turn local echo off, type the Escape character (<Ctrl>+<]>).  
Set carriage return-line feed  
Unless commanded otherwise, Telnet transmits a line feed character only (no carriage return)  
to the connected switcher when you press the <Enter> key. This is the correct setting for SIS  
communication with the switcher. The Telnet set crlfcommand forces Telnet to transmit  
carriage return and line feed characters when <Enter> is pressed, but if crlf is set, the SIS link  
with the switcher does not function properly.  
Close  
To close the link to the switcher, access the Telnet prompt by typing the Escape character  
(<Ctrl>+<]>). At the Telnet prompt, type close, and then press <Enter>.  
Help  
For Telnet command definitions, at the Telnet prompt, type ?and then press <Enter>.  
Quit  
Exit the Telnet utility by typing quitand then pressing <Enter> at the Telnet prompt. If you  
are connected to the MTPX Plus switcher, access the Telnet prompt by typing the Escape  
character (<Ctrl>+<]>).  
MTPX Plus Series • Ethernet Connection 150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Subnetting — A Primer  
It is not the purpose of this guide to describe TCP/IP protocol in detail. However, some  
understanding of TCP/IP subnetting (a subnet is a subset of a network — a set of IP devices  
that have portions of their IP addresses in common) is necessary in order to understand the  
interaction of the MTPX Plus switcher and the mail server gateway. To understand subnetting  
at the level required to install and operate the MTPX Plus switcher, you must understand the  
concepts of a gateway, local and remote devices, IP addresses and octets, and subnet masks  
and octets.  
Gateways  
The MTPX Plus switcher can communicate with the e-mail server that the switcher uses for  
e-mail notification directly (if they are on the same subnet) or the communication can be  
routed via a gateway (a computer that provides a link between different subnets).  
Local and Remote Devices  
The local and remote devices are defined from the point of view of the function being  
described. In this guide, subnetting is an issue when you are using the controlling PC to set  
TCP/IP and e-mail values in the matrix switcher (see IP Settings/Options Window and  
Email Settings Page). When you are setting up the variables for e-mail notification, which  
may include subnetting, the matrix switcher is the local device and the e-mail server is the  
remote device.  
IP Addresses and Octets  
Valid IP addresses consist of four 1-, 2-, or 3-digit numeric subfields, properly called “octets,”  
separated by dots (periods) (see figure 94). Each octet can be numbered from 000 through  
255. Leading zeroes, up to three digits total per octet, are optional. Values of 256 and above  
are invalid.  
Typical IP Address: 192.168.254.254  
Octets  
Figure 94. Typical IP Address  
Subnet Masks and Octets  
The subnet mask (see figure 95) is used to determine whether the local and remote devices  
are on the same subnet or different subnets. The subnet mask consists of four numeric  
octets separated by dots. Each octet can be numbered from 000 through 255. Leading  
zeroes, up to three digits total per octet, are optional. Each octet typically contains either  
255 or 0. The octets determine whether or not the same octets of two IP addresses will be  
compared when determining if two devices are on the same subnet.  
255 indicates that this octet will be  
0 indicates that this octet will not be  
compared between two IP addresses.  
compared between two IP addresses.  
Typical Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0  
Octets  
Figure 95. Typical Subnet Mask  
MTPX Plus Series • Ethernet Connection 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Determining Whether Devices Are on the Same Subnet  
To determine the subnet, the IP address of the local device is compared to the IP address  
of the remote device (see figure 96). The octets of each address are compared or not  
compared, depending on the value in the related subnet mask octet.  
If a subnet mask octet contains the value 255, the related octets of the IP addresses of  
the local device and the remote device are unmasked.  
Unmasked octets are compared (indicated by ? in figure 96).  
If the subnet mask octet contains the value 0, the related octets of the IP addresses of  
the local device and remote device are masked.  
Masked octets are not compared (indicated by X in figure 96).  
If the unmasked octets of the two IP addresses match (indicated by = in figure 96, example 1),  
the two addresses are on the same subnet.  
If the two unmasked fields do not match (indicated by in figure 96, example 2 and  
example 3), the addresses are not on the same subnet.  
Example 1  
Example 2  
Example 3  
Local IP Address: 192.168.254.254  
192.168.254.254  
192.168.254.254  
Subnet Mask: 255.255.0.0 (?.?.X.X) 255.255.0.0 (?.?.X.X) 255.255.0.0 (?.?.X.X)  
Remote IP Address: 192.168.2.25  
190.190.2.25  
..X.X No match =..X.X No match  
(Different subnet) (Different subnet)  
192.190.2.25  
Match?: =.=.X.X Match  
(Same subnet)  
Figure 96. Comparing the IP Addresses of the Local and Remote Devices  
MTPX Plus Series • Ethernet Connection 152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Reference  
Information  
This section discusses the specifications, part numbers, and accessories for the  
MTPX Matrix Switchers. Topics that are covered include:  
Specifications  
Video  
Routing  
MTPX Plus 816 ................. 8 x 16 matrix, 3 x 1 local  
MTPX Plus 128 ................. 12 x 8 matrix, 4 x 2 local  
MTPX Plus 168 ................. 16 x 8 matrix, 3 x 1 local  
MTPX Plus 1616 ............... 16 x 16 matrix, 3 x 1 local  
MTPX Plus 1632 ............... 16 x 32 matrix, 6 x 2 local  
MTPX Plus 3216 ............... 32 x 16 matrix, 6 x 2 local  
MTPX Plus 3232 ............... 32 x 32 matrix, 6 x 2 local  
Gain............................................ Unity ±1 dB  
Crosstalk  
128 models ...................... -76 dB @ 1 MHz, -55 dB @ 10 MHz, -45 dB @ 30 MHz, -30 dB @ 100 MHz  
816, 168, 1616 models .... -80 dB @ 1 MHz, -71 dB @ 5 MHz, -55 dB @ 10 MHz, -45 dB @ 30 MHz, -37  
dB @ 100 MHz  
1632, 3216, 3232 models -90 dB @ 1 MHz, -76 @ 5 MHz, -72 dB @ 10 MHz, -60 dB @ 30 MHz, -50 dB @  
100 MHz  
Switching speed.......................... 200 ms (max.)  
Video input — local  
Number/signal type ..................... 3, 4, or 6 analog RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs, component video (bi-level and  
tri-level), S-video, composite video  
Connectors ................................. 3, 4, or 6 female 15-pin HD  
Nominal level .............................. 1 Vp-p for Y of component video and S-video, and for composite video  
0.7 Vp-p for RGB and for R-Y and B-Y of component video  
0.3 Vp-p for C of S-video  
Impedance .................................. 75 ohms 5%  
Horizontal frequency................... 15 kHz to 130 kHz  
Vertical frequency........................ 30 Hz to 150 Hz  
Return loss.................................. <-30 dB @ 5 MHz  
DC offset (max. allowable) .......... 250 mV  
MTPX Plus Series • Reference Information 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Video input — main (see transmitters' output specifications)  
Number/signal type ..................... 8, 16, or 32 proprietary analog signals  
Connectors ................................. 8, 16, or 32 (depending on configuration) female RJ-45 connectors  
Video output — local  
Number/signal type ..................... 1 or 2 analog RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs, component video (bi-level and tri-  
level sync), S-video, composite video  
Connectors ................................. 1 or 2 female 15-pin HD  
Nominal level .............................. 0.7 Vp-p for RGB  
Impedance .................................. 75 ohms 10%  
Return loss.................................. <-30 dB @ 5 MHz  
DC offset .................................... <±40 mV with input at 0 offset  
Video output — main (see receivers' input specifications)  
Number/signal type ..................... 8, 16, or 32 proprietary analog signals  
Connectors ................................. 8, 16, or 32 (depending on configuration) female RJ-45 connectors  
Sync — local inputs and outputs only  
Input type ................................... RGBHV, RGBS, RGsB, RsGsBs  
Output type ................................ See receiver specifications (on Web site).  
Standards.................................... NTSC 3.58, NTSC 4.43, PAL, SECAM  
Input level ................................... 3.5 V to 5.0 Vp-p, DC  
Output level ................................ See receiver specifications (on Web site).  
Input impedance ......................... 611 ohms 5%  
Output impedance ...................... 105 ohms 30 ohms  
Max. output voltage.................... =4.0 VDC with a 2k ohm load  
Max. rise/fall time........................ 4 ns  
Polarity........................................ Positive or negative  
Audio  
Routing  
MTPX Plus 816 ................. 8 x 16 mono matrix, 3 x 4 local  
MTPX Plus 128 ................. 12 x 8 mono matrix, 4 x 2 local  
MTPX Plus 168 ................. 16 x 8 mono matrix, 3 x 4 local  
MTPX Plus 1616 ............... 16 x 16 mono matrix, 3 x 4 local  
MTPX Plus 1632 ............... 16 x 32 mono matrix, 6 x 8 local  
MTPX Plus 3216 ............... 32 x 16 mono matrix, 6 x 8 local  
MTPX Plus 3232 ............... 32 x 32 mono matrix, 6 x 8 local  
Gain (local inputs and outputs).... Unbalanced output: 0 dB ±2 dB with a 600 ohm load, single ended  
Balanced output: +6 dB ±2 dB with a 600 ohm load, single ended  
Frequency response..................... 20 Hz to 20 kHz, ±1 dB  
THD + Noise................................ =0.15% @ 1 kHz at nominal level  
S/N.............................................. >70 dB at maximum output (unweighted)  
CMRR ......................................... >43 dB @ 20 Hz to 20 kHz  
Audio input — local  
Number/signal type ..................... 3, 4, or 6 stereo, balanced/unbalanced  
Connectors ................................. (3, 4, or 6) 3.5 mm captive screw connectors, 5 pole  
Impedance .................................. >10k ohms unbalanced  
Nominal level .............................. +4 dBu (1.23 Vrms), -10 dBV (316 mVrms)  
Maximum level............................ +18 dBu, (unbalanced) at 1% THD+N  
NOTE: 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms, 0 dBV = 1 Vrms, 0 dBV 2 dBu.  
MTPX Plus Series • Reference Information 154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio input — main (see transmitters' output specifications)  
Number/signal type ..................... 8, 16, or 32 proprietary analog signals  
Connectors ................................. 8, 16, or 32 (depending on configuration) female RJ-45 connectors  
Audio output — local  
Number/signal type ..................... 2, 4, or 8 dual mono, balanced/unbalanced  
Connectors ................................. (2, 4, or 8) 3.5 mm captive screw connectors, 5 pole  
Impedance .................................. 50 ohms unbalanced, 100 ohms balanced 10%  
Gain error ................................... ±2 dB channel to channel  
Maximum level (=10k ohms) ....... +16 dBu, balanced or unbalanced at 1% THD+N  
Maximum level (600 ohm)........... +15 dBm, balanced or unbalanced at 1% THD+N  
Audio output — main (see receivers' input specifications)  
Number/signal type ..................... 8, 16, or 32 proprietary analog signals  
Connectors ................................. 8, 16, or 32 (depending on configuration) female RJ-45 connectors  
Control/remote — switcher host control  
Serial host control ports  
MTPX Plus 128 ................. 1 RS-232, rear panel 3.5 mm captive screw connector, 3 pole  
All other models............... 1 RS-232 or RS-422, rear panel female 9-pin D connector  
1 RS-232 front panel 2.5 mm mini stereo jack  
Baud rate and protocol................ 9600 baud (default), 19200, 38400, and 115200 (adjustable); 8 data bits;  
1 stop bit; no parity  
Serial control pin configurations  
9-pin female D connector. RS-232: 2 = Tx, 3 = Rx, 5 = GND  
RS-422: 2 = Tx-, 3 = Rx-, 5 = GND, 7 = Rx+, 8 = Tx+  
Mini stereo jack................ Tip = Tx, ring = Rx, sleeve = GND  
Captive screw connector .. RS-232: 1 = Tx, 2 = Rx, 3 = GND  
USB control ports  
MTPX Plus 128 ................. 1 front panel female mini USB B  
USB standards  
MTPX Plus 128 ................. USB 2.0, low speed  
Ethernet control port................... 1 RJ-45 female connector  
Ethernet data rate....................... 10/100Base-T, half/full duplex with autodetect  
Ethernet protocol ........................ ARP, ICMP (ping), IP, TCP, UDP, DHCP, HTTP, SMTP, Telnet  
Default settings........................... Link speed and duplex level = autodetected  
IP address = 192.168.254.254  
Subnet mask = 255.255.0.0  
Gateway = 0.0.0.0  
DHCP = off  
Web server.................................. Up to 200 simultaneous sessions  
16 MB nonvolatile user memory  
Program control .......................... Extron control/configuration program for Windows®  
Extron Simple Instruction Set(SIS)  
Microsoft® Internet Explorer® version 6 or higher, Telnet  
MTPX Plus Series • Reference Information 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Control/remote — external device (pass-through, unidirectional, or bidirectional)  
Serial control ports ...................... RS-232, 3.5 mm captive screw connectors, 3 pole  
3232 and 1632 models .... 16 connectors  
3216, 1616, 128, and 816 models ..... 8 connectors  
168 models ...................... 4 connectors  
Baud rate and protocol................ Up to 38400 baud, 9600 baud (default); 5-8 data bits; 1 or 2 stop bits; odd,  
even, or no parity; XON, XOFF, or no flow control  
NOTE: Protocol is mirrored between the switcher and the receiver.  
Serial control pin configurations .. 1 = Tx, 2 = Rx, 3 = GND  
General  
Recommended cable type ........... Shielded or unshielded CAT 5/5e/6/7 or  
Extron Enhanced Skew-FreeA/V UTP  
Power ......................................... 100 VAC to 240 VAC, 50-60 Hz, internal  
1632, 3216, 3232 models 220 watts  
816, 168, 1616 models .... 120 watts  
128 model........................ 73 watts  
Temperature/humidity ................. Storage: -40 to +158 °F (-40 to +70 °C) / 10% to 90%, noncondensing  
Operating: +32 to +122 °F (0 to +50 °C) / 10% to 90%, noncondensing  
Cooling....................................... Fan, left to right (as viewed from the front panel)  
Thermal dissipation  
128 model  
115 VAC, 60 Hz ........ 231.1 BTU/hr  
240 VAC, 50 Hz ........ 223.8 BTU/hr  
1616 model  
115 VAC, 60 Hz ........ 348.3 BTU/hr  
240 VAC, 50 Hz ........ 353.0 BTU/hr  
3232 model  
115 VAC, 60 Hz ........ 607.1 BTU/hr  
240 VAC, 50 Hz ........ 595.3 BTU/hr  
Rack mount................................. Yes  
Enclosure type............................. Metal  
Enclosure dimensions .................. Depth excludes connectors, width excludes rack ears.  
1632, 3216, 3232 models 5.25" H x 17.0" W x 9.4" D (3U high, full rack wide)  
(13.3 cm H x 43.1 cm W x 23.9 cm D)  
816, 168, 1616 models .... 3.5" H x 17.0" W x 9.4" D (2U high, full rack wide)  
(8.9 cm H x 43.1 cm W x 23.9 cm D)  
128 model........................ 1.7" H x 17.4" W x 12.0" D (1U high, full rack wide)  
(4.3 cm H x 44.2 cm W x 30.5 cm D)  
Product weight  
1632, 3216, 3232 models 16.0 lbs (7.3 kg)  
816, 168, 1616 models .... 8.5 lbs (3.9 kg)  
128 model........................ 3.7 lbs (1.6 kg)  
Shipping weight  
1632, 3216, 3232 models 26 lbs (ll.8 kg)  
816, 168, 1616 models .... 18 lbs (9 kg)  
128 model........................ 7 lbs (4 kg)  
DIM weight (International)  
1632, 3216, 3232 models 26 lbs (11.8 kg)  
816, 168, 1616 models .... 18 lbs (9 kg)  
128 model........................ 7 lbs (4 kg)  
Vibration..................................... ISTA 1A in carton (International Safe Transit Association)  
MTPX Plus Series • Reference Information 156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Regulatory compliance  
Safety............................... CE, c-UL, UL  
EMI/EMC.......................... CE, C-tick, FCC Class A, ICES, VCCI Class A  
Environmental .................. Complies with the appropriate requirements of WEEE.  
MTBF .......................................... 30,000 hours  
Warranty..................................... 3 years parts and labor  
NOTES: All nominal levels are at 10%.  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
Part Numbers and Accessories  
MTPX Plus Matrix Switcher Part Numbers  
Matrix switcher part numbers  
MTPX Plus 816  
Part Number  
60-834-01  
60-1015-01  
60-833-01  
60-832-01  
60-898-01  
60-899-01  
60-897-01  
MTPX Plus 128  
MTPX Plus 168  
MTPX Plus 1616  
MTPX Plus 1632  
MTPX Plus 3216  
MTPX Plus 3232  
Included Parts  
These items are included in each order for an MTPX Plus matrix switcher:  
Included parts  
Part Number  
Tweeker (small screwdriver)  
MTPX Plus Matrix Switcher Setup Guide  
5-pole captive screw audio connectors  
(6, 7, or 14, depending on the model)  
3-pole captive screw connectors  
(5, 8, or 16, depending on the model)  
MTP Signal Generator (all except MTPX Plus 128)  
70-729-01  
Extron Software Products DVD (Matrix Switchers Control Program  
and Button-Label Generator)  
Replacement Parts and Accessories  
Replacement parts  
Part Number  
Button and cap diffuser kit  
70-352-01  
Button overlays  
MTP Signal Generator (suggested for MTPX Plus 128)  
5-pole captive screw audio connectors (qty. 10)  
70-729-01  
100-460-01  
MTPX Plus Series • Reference Information 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Optional Accessories  
These items can be ordered separately:  
Adapters, mounting, controllers, connectors  
Part Number  
MBD 149 1U through desk and rack mounting kit  
70-077-03  
(for MTPX Plus 128 only)  
MKP 2000 matrix switcher X-Y remote control panel  
Black  
60-682-02  
60-682-03  
White  
MKP 3000  
Black  
60-708-02  
60-708-03  
White  
MKP 3000 MAAP  
Black  
60-709-02  
60-709-03  
60-709-22  
White  
MKP 3000 L (lectern mounted)  
Cables  
NOTE: Enhanced Skew-Free™ A/V UTP cables are not recommended for Ethernet LAN  
applications..  
Enhanced Skew-FreeA/V cable  
Part Number  
UTP23SF Enhanced Skew-Free A/V UTP cable  
26-569-xx  
(cut, various lengths)  
UTP23SF Enhanced Skew-Free A/V 1000' UTP  
(Bulk) (non-plenum)  
22-141-03  
22-142-03  
UTP23SF-4P/1000 Plenum enhanced Skew-Free A/V UTP cable (bulk),  
1000' (300 m)  
Male-to-female VGA molded connector cables  
Part Number  
VGA M-F MD series, 3' (0.9 m) to 100' (30.4 m)  
26-112-nn  
Male-to-female VGA backshell connector cables  
Part Number  
VGA M-F BK series, 3’ (0.9 m) to 100’ (30.4 m)  
26-112-nn  
Male-to-male VGA molded connector cables  
Part Number  
VGA M-M MD series, 3’ (0.9 m) to 100’ (30.4 m)  
26-238-nn  
Male-to-male VGA molded connector cables  
Part Number  
VGA M-M BK series, 3’ (0.9 m) to 100’ (30.4 m)  
26-238-nn  
MTPX Plus Series • Reference Information 158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connectors  
Connector  
Part Number  
100-476-01  
100-477-01  
100-478-01  
100-479-01  
100-480-01  
100-481-01  
100-482-01  
CAT 6 jack (black), qty. 10  
CAT 6 jack (red), qty. 10  
CAT 6 jack (blue), qty. 10  
CAT 6 jack (orange), qty. 10  
CAT 6 jack (gray), qty. 10  
CAT 6 jack (white), qty. 10  
CAT 6 jack (ivory), qty. 10  
Mounting the Switcher  
The MTPX Plus switchers are housed in a 1U high (MTPX Plus 128), 2U high  
(other matrix sizes 1616 and smaller), or 3U high (matrix sizes 1632 and larger) metal  
enclosures. The 1U enclosure is rack mountable using the provided MBD 149 Through-desk  
and rack mouting kit (part number 70-077-03). The 2U and 3U enclosures are mountable  
without extra hardware.  
Tabletop Use  
For tabletop use, affix one of the supplied self-adhesive rubber feet to each corner of the  
bottom of the switcher.  
UL Rack-Mounting Guidelines  
The following Underwriters Laboratories (UL) requirements pertain to the installation of the  
matrix switcher into a wall or furniture.  
1. Elevated operating ambient temperature — If installed in a closed or multi-unit rack  
assembly, the operating ambient temperature of the rack environment may be greater  
than room ambient. Therefore, consider installing the equipment in an environment  
compatible with the maximum ambient temperature (Tma = +122 °F, +50 °C) specified  
by Extron.  
2. Reduced air flow — Installation of the equipment in a rack should be such that the  
amount of air flow required for safe operation of the equipment is not compromised.  
3. Mechanical loading — Mounting of the equipment in the rack should be such that a  
hazardous condition is not achieved due to uneven mechanical loading.  
4. Circuit overloading — Consideration should be given to the connection of the  
equipment to the supply circuit and the effect that overloading of the circuits might  
have on overcurrent protection and supply wiring. Appropriate consideration of  
equipment nameplate ratings should be used when addressing this concern.  
5. Reliable earthing (grounding) — Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment  
should be maintained. Particular attention should be given to supply connections other  
than direct connections to the branch circuit (such as use of power strips).  
MTPX Plus Series • Reference Information 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Mounting Instructions  
If desired, rack mount the unit as follows:  
1. If feet were installed on the bottom of the transmitter assembly, remove them.  
2. MTPX Plus 128 only — Fasten the optional MBD 149 rack mounting brackets  
(part number 70-077-03) to the unit using eight machine screws supplied with the kit  
(see figure 97).  
Optional Rack Mounting Bracket  
Figure 97. Attaching the Mounting Brackets  
3. Insert the switcher into the rack, aligning the holes in the mounting flanges with those  
in the rack (see figure 98).  
Figure 98. Installing the Switcher in a Rack  
4. Secure the switcher to the rack using the supplied bolts.  
NOTE: Extron recommends that you allow 1U of rack space above and below the  
switcher for ventilation..  
MTPX Plus Series • Reference Information 160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Button Labels  
Page 162 provides strips of blank button labels. If desired, copy them or cut them out, write  
button information in each button area as desired, and put them in the input or output  
button windows. You can also create labels using the Button-Label Generator software (see  
Button-Label Generator“ in the “Matrix Software” section).  
Installing Labels  
Install new labels in the matrix switcher front panel buttons as follows:  
1. Make new labels using either the blanks on page 162 or the Button-Label Generator  
software. Cut them out.  
NOTE: For best results, print on transparent or translucent material..  
2. Remove the button from the MTPX: use a small, flat bladed screwdriver to gently pry a  
button out from the front panel (see figure 99).  
Base  
TEXT  
Diffuser  
Clear Lens  
Button Label  
Pry the two  
pieces apart.  
Separate the two-  
piece button here at  
the corner.  
Figure 99. Illuminated Button Label Replacement  
3. Locate the notch in the corner of one side of the clear button cap lens.  
4. Separate the white backing (diffuser) from the clear button cap (lens): insert the blade of  
the small screwdriver into the corner notch and gently twist the blade.  
5. Save the translucent, white diffuser, but remove the text/label insert from the  
transparent button cap lens.  
6. Insert the replacement button label into the button cap. Check for correct label  
orientation.  
7. Align the white diffuser plate with the cap (lens). The bumps on the diffuser plate  
should be aligned (top and bottom) with the notches on the clear button cap. Firmly  
snap it into place.  
8. Align the tabs on the plunger of the MTPX with the notches on the diffuser plate.  
Gently, but firmly, press the reassembled button into place in the front panel of the  
switcher.  
9. Repeat steps 2 through 8 as needed to relabel other buttons.  
MTPX Plus Series • Reference Information 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
MTPX Plus Series • Reference Information 162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Extron Warranty  
Extron Electronics warrants this product against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of three years  
from the date of purchase. In the event of malfunction during the warranty period attributable directly to faulty  
workmanship and/or materials, Extron Electronics will, at its option, repair or replace said products or components,  
to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore said product to proper operating condition, provided that it is  
returned within the warranty period, with proof of purchase and description of malfunction to:  
USA, Canada, South America,  
Japan:  
and Central America:  
Extron Electronics  
1001 East Ball Road  
Anaheim, CA 92805  
U.S.A.  
Extron Electronics, Japan  
Kyodo Building, 16 Ichibancho  
Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 102-0082  
Japan  
Europe, Africa, and the Middle  
East:  
Extron Europe  
Hanzeboulevard 10  
3825 PH Amersfoort  
The Netherlands  
China:  
Extron China  
686 Ronghua Road  
Songjiang District  
Shanghai 201611  
China  
Asia:  
Extron Asia  
Middle East:  
Extron Middle East  
135 Joo Seng Road, #04-01  
PM Industrial Bldg.  
Singapore 368363  
Singapore  
Dubai Airport Free Zone  
F12, PO Box 293666  
United Arab Emirates, Dubai  
This Limited Warranty does not apply if the fault has been caused by misuse, improper handling care, electrical or  
mechanical abuse, abnormal operating conditions, or if modifications were made to the product that were not  
authorized by Extron.  
NOTE: If a product is defective, please call Extron and ask for an Application Engineer to receive an RA (Return  
Authorization) number. This will begin the repair process.  
USA: (714) 491-1500  
Asia: +65.6383.4400  
Europe: +31.33.453.4040  
Japan: +81.3.3511.7655  
Units must be returned insured, with shipping charges prepaid. If not insured, you assume the risk of loss or damage  
during shipment. Returned units must include the serial number and a description of the problem, as well as the  
name of the person to contact in case there are any questions.  
Extron Electronics makes no further warranties either expressed or implied with respect to the product and its quality,  
performance, merchantability, or fitness for any particular use. In no event will Extron Electronics be liable for direct,  
indirect, or consequential damages resulting from any defect in this product even if Extron Electronics has been  
advised of such damage.  
Please note that laws vary from state to state and country to country, and that some provisions of this warranty may  
not apply to you.  
Extron USA - East  
Extron Europe  
Extron Asia  
Extron Japan  
Extron China  
Extron Middle East  
+800.7339.8766  
Inside Asia Only  
+81.3.3511.7655  
+81.3.3511.7656 FAX  
+400.883.1568  
Inside China Only  
+971.4.2991800  
+971.4.2991880 FAX  
+800.633.9876  
Inside USA/Canada Only  
+800.633.9876  
Inside USA/Canada Only  
+800.3987.6673  
Inside Europe Only  
+65.6383.4400  
+65.6383.4664 FAX  
+86.21.3760.1568  
+86.21.3760.1566 FAX  
+1.714.491.1500  
+1.714.491.1517 FAX  
+1.919.863.1794  
+1.919.863.1797 FAX  
+31.33.453.4040  
+31.33.453.4050 FAX  
© 2011 Extron Electronics. All rights reserved. www.extron.com  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 

Eiki Projector LC SM4 User Manual
Electro Voice Portable Speaker EVS 15B User Manual
EverFocus Security Camera ED300 Series User Manual
Exmark Lawn Mower 4500 371 User Manual
Fisher Price Car Seat P2792 User Manual
Fisher Price High Chair L0542 User Manual
Fluke Calculator 5500A COIL User Manual
Fostex Music Mixer EN3020 User Manual
GE Automobile Accessories WSM2700 80D User Manual
Gemini MP3 Player CDMP 1300 User Manual